Bridge Superstructure Design

Bridge Superstructure Design
ISO BRG083110M3 Rev. 3

Berkeley, California, USA
Version 15
November 2011

CSiBridge

COPYRIGHT
Copyright Computers & Structures, Inc., 1978-2011
All rights reserved.

The CSI Logois a registered trademark of Computers & Structures, Inc. CSiBridge
TM

and Watch & Learn
TM
are trademarks of Computers & Structures, Inc. Adobeand
Acrobatare registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorported. AutoCAD
TM
is a
registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

The computer program CSiBridge
TM
and all associated documentation are proprietary
and copyrighted products. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers &
Structures, Inc. Unlicensed use of these programs or reproduction of documentation in
any form, without prior written authorization from Computers & Structures, Inc., is
explicitly prohibited.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any
means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior explicit written
permission of the publisher.
Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:
Computers & Structures, Inc.
1995 University Avenue
Berkeley, California 94704 USA

Phone: (510) 649-2200
FAX: (510) 649-2299
e-mail: info@csiberkeley.com (for general questions)
e-mail: support@csiberkeley.com (for technical support questions)
web: www.csiberkeley.com

DISCLAIMER
CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE
DEVELOPMENT AND TESTING OF THIS SOFTWARE. HOWEVER, THE USER
ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS ON THE ACCURACY
OR THE RELIABILITY OF THIS PRODUCT.
THIS PRODUCT IS A PRACTICAL AND POWERFUL TOOL FOR STRUCTURAL
DESIGN. HOWEVER, THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE BASIC
ASSUMPTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE MODELING, ANALYSIS, AND DESIGN
ALGORITHMS AND COMPENSATE FOR THE ASPECTS THAT ARE NOT
ADDRESSED.
THE INFORMATION PRODUCED BY THE SOFTWARE MUST BE CHECKED BY
A QUALIFIED AND EXPERIENCED ENGINEER. THE ENGINEER MUST
INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS AND TAKE PROFESSIONAL
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INFORMATION THAT IS USED.

i
Contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Organization 1-1
1.2 Recommended Reading 1-2
2 Design Prerequisites
2-1 AASHTO LRFD 2-2
2.1.1 Load Pattern Types 2-2
2.1.2 Design Load Combinations 2-3
2.1.3 Default Load Combinations 2-4
2.2 CAN/CSA-S6-S06 2-6
2.3 Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 3-11

CSiBridge Superstructure Design
ii
3 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors (LLDF)
3.1 AASHTO-LRFD 2007 3-1
3.1.1 Algorithm for Determining Live Load Distribution
Factors (LLDF) 3-2
3.1.2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors 3-2
3.1.3 Apply LLD Factors 3-4
3.1.3.1 User Specified 3-4
3.1.3.2 Calculated by CSiBridge in Accordance
with AASHTO-LFRD 2007 3-4
3.1.3.3 Read Directly from Girder 3-5
3.1.3.4 Uniformly Distribution to Girders 3-5
3.1.4 Generate Virtual Combinations 3-5
3.1.4.1 Stress Check 3-5
3.1.4.2 Shear or Moment Check 3-6
3.1.5 Read Forces/Stresses Directly from Girders 3-6
3.1.6 LLDF Design Example Using Method 2 3-7
3.2 CAN/CSA-S6-06 3-16
3.2.1 Algorithm for Determining Live Load Distribution
Factors (LLDF) 3-16
3.2.2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors 3-17
3.2.3 Moment Region 3-18
3.2.4 Apply LLD Factors 3-18
3.2.4.1 User Specified 3-19
3.2.4.2 Calculated by CSiBridge in Accordance
with CAN/CSA-S6-06 3-19
3.2.4.3 Forces Read Directly from Girders 3-19
3.2.4.4 Uniformly Distribution to Girders 3-19
3.2.5 Generate Virtual Combinations 3-20
3.2.6 Read Forces/Stresses Directly from Girders 3-21
4 Define a Bridge Design Request
4.1 Name and Bridge Object 4-3
Contents
iii
4.2 Check Type 4-3
4.3 Station Range 4-5
4.4 Design Parameters 4-5
4.5 Demand Sets 4-17
4.6 Live Load Distribution Factors 4-17
5 Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges
5.1 AASHTO 5-2
5.1.1 Stress Design AASHTO-STD-2002 5-2
5.1.1.1 Capacity Parameters 5-2
5.1.1.2 Demand Parameters 5-2
5.1.1.3 Algorithm 5-3
5.1.2 Stress Design AASHTO-LFRD-2007 5-3
5.1.2.3 Stress Design Example 5-4
5.1.3 Flexure Design AASHTO-LRFD-2007 5-6
5.1.3.2 Variables 5-6
5.1.3.3 Design Process 5-7
5.1.3.5 Flexure Design Example 5-10
5.1.4 Shear Design AASHTO-LRFD-2007 5-15
5.1.4.5 Shear Design Example 5-24
5.1.5 Principal Stress Design, AASHTO-LRFD-2007 5-31
5.1.5.2 Demand Parameters 5-31
5.2 CAN/CSA-S6-06 5-33
5.2.1 Stress Design 5-33
5.2.2 Flexure Design 5-33
iv
5.2.2.3 Algorithms 5-35
5.2.3 Shear Design 5-38
6 Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA
6.1 AASHTO-LRFD 2007 6-1
6.2 CAN/CSA-S6-06 6-14
Contents
v
7 Design Algorithms for Precast I and U-Girder Bridges
7.1 AASHTO-LFRD 2007 7-1
7.1.1 Design Stress 7-2
7.1.2 Design Shear 7-2
7.1.2.4 Shear Design Example 7-9
7.1.3 Design of Flexural 7-14
7.1.3.4 Flexure Design Capacity Example 7-19
7.2 CAN/CSA-S6-06 7-23
7.2.3 Flexural Design 7-30
vi
8 Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab
8.1 Strength Properties 8-1
8.1.1 Yield Moments 8-1
8.1.2 Plastic Moments 8-3
8.1.3 Section Classification and Factors 8-7
8.2 Demand Sets 8-11
8.2.1 Demand Flange Stress f
bu
and f
f
8-12
8.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending Stress f
1
8-13
8.2.3 Depth of Web in Compression 8-14
8.3 Strength Design Request 8-15
8.3.1 Flexure 8-15
8.3.2 Shear 8-21
8.4 Service Design Request 8-24
8.5 Web Fatigue Design Request 8-26
8.6 Constructibility Design Request 8-27
8.6.1 Staged (Steel-I Comp Construct Stgd) 8-27
8.6.2 Non-Staged (Steel Comp Construct NonStgd) 8-27
8.6.3 Slab Status vs. Unbraced Length 8-27
8.6.4 Flexure 8-28
8.6.5 Shear 8-30
8.7 Section Optimization 8-33
9 Run a Bridge Design Request
9.1 Description of Example Model 9-2
9.2 Design Preferences 9-3
9.3 Load Combinations 9-3
9.4 Bridge Design Request 9-5
9.5 Start Design/Check of Structure 9-6
Contents
vii
10 Design Output
10.1 Display Results as a Plot 10-1
10.1.1 Additional Display Examples 10-2
10.2 Display Data Tables 10-7
10.3 Advanced Report Writer 10-8
10.4 Verification 10-11
Bibliography
viii
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge
Design Form AASHTO LRFD 2-5
Figure 2-2 Define Load Combinations Form AASHTO LRFD 2-6
Figure 2-3 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge
Design Form CAN/CSA-S6-06 2-10
Figure 2-4 Define Load Combinations Form CAN/CSA-S6-06 2-11
Figure 2-5 Define Code-Generated Load Combinations for
Bridge Design from Eurocode 2-18
Figure 2-6 Define Load Combination form Eurocode 2-19
Figure 3-1 General Dimensions 3-8
Figure 3-2 Lever Rule 3-11
Figure 4-1 Bridge Design Request Concrete Box Girder Bridges 4-2
Figure 4-2 Bridge Design Request Compost I or U Girder Bridges 4-2
Figure 4-3 Bridge Design Request form Steel I Beam
with Composite Slab 4-3
Figure 4-4 Superstructure Design Request Parameters form 4-6
Figure 5-1 LRFD 2007 Stress Design, ASSHTO Box Beam,
Type BIII-48 5-4
Figure 5-2 Reinforcement, LRFD 2007 Stress Design AASHTO Box
Beam, Type BIII-48 5-5
Figure 5-3 LRFD 2007 Flexure Design Cross-Section, AASHTO Box
Figure 5-4 Reinforcement, LRFD 2007 Flexure Design Cross-Section,
AASHTO Box Bea, Type BIII-48 5-11
Figure 5-5 Shear Design Example, AASHTO Box Beam,
Type BIII-48 5-24
Figure 5-6 Shear Design Example Reinforcement, AASHTO Box
Figure 5-7 Rectangular Stress Distribution,
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 5-49
Figure 5-8 Idealized and Design Stress-Strain Diagrams for
Reinforcing Steel for Tension and Compression,
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 5-50
Contents
ix
Figure 5-9 Idealized and Design Stress-Strain Diagrams for Prestressing
Steel, Absolute Values are Shown for Tensile Stress and
Strain, Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 5-50
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 6-29
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 6-29
Prestressing Steel, Absolute Values are Shown
for Tensile Stress and Strain, Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 6-30
Figure 7-1 Shear design example deck section 7-9
Figure 7-2 Shear design example beam section 7-10
Figure 7-3 Flexure capacity design example deck section 7-19
Figure 7-4 Flexure capacity design example beam section 7-20
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 7-37
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 7-37
Prestressing Steel, Absolute Values are Shown
for Tensile Stress and Strain, Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 7-38
Figure 8-1 Steel I-Beam with Composite Section 8-5
Figure 8-2 Steel I-Beam Composite Section 8-6
Figure 9-1 3D view of example concrete box girder bridge model 9-2
Figure 9-2 Elevation view of example bridge 9-2
Figure 9-3 Plan view of the example bridge 9-3
Figure 9-4 Bridge Design Preferences form 9-3
Figure 9-5 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design
form 9-4
Figure 9-6 Define Load Combinations form 9-4
Figure 9- 7 Define Load Combinations form 9-5
Figure 9-8 Perform Bridge Design - Superstructure 9-6
Figure 9-9 Plot of flexure check results 9-6
x
Figure 10-1 Plot of flexure check results for the example bridge
design model 10-2
Figure 10-2 Select the location on the beam or slab for which
results are to be displayed 10-3
Figure 10-3 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section External
Girders Vertical 10-4
Girders Sloped 10-4
Girders Clipped 10-4
Girders and Radius 10-5
Girders Sloped Max 10-5
Figure 10-8 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section Advanced 10-6
Figure 10-9 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section -
AASHTO PCI ASBI Standard 10-6
Figure 10-10 Choose Tables for Display form 10-7
Figure 10-11 Design database table for AASHTO LRFD 2007
flexure check 10-8
Figure 10-12 Choose Tables for Export to Access form 10-9
Figure 10-13 Create Custom Report form 10-10
Figure 10-14 An example of the printed output 10-11

1 - 1
Chapter 1
Introduction
As the ultimate versatile, integrated tool for modeling, analysis, and design of
bridge structures, CSiBridge can apply appropriate code-specific design
processes to concrete box girder bridge design, design when the superstructure
includes Precast Concrete Box bridges with a composite slab and steel I-beam
bridges with composite slabs. The ease with which these tasks can be accom-
plished makes CSiBridge the most productive bridge design package in the
industry.
Design using CSiBridge is based on load patterns, load cases, load combina-
tions and design requests. The design output can then be displayed graphically
and printed using a customized reporting format.
It should be noted that the design of bridge superstructure is a complex subject
and the design codes cover many aspects of this process. CSiBridge is a tool to
help the user with that process. Only the aspects of design documented in this
manual are automated by the CSiBridge design capabilities. The user must
check the results produced and address other aspects not covered by CSi-
Bridge.
1.1 Organization
This manual is designed to help you become productive using CSi-
Bridge design in accordance with the available codes when modeling
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design
1 - 2 Recommended Reading/Practice
concrete box girder bridges and precast concrete girder bridges. Chap-
ter 2 describes code-specific design prerequisites. Chapter 3 describes
Live Load Distribution Factors. Chapter 4 describes defining the de-
sign request, which includes the design request name, a bridge object
name (i.e., the bridge model), check type (i.e., the type of design), sta-
tion range (i.e., portion of the bridge to be designed), design parame-
ters (i.e., overwrites for default parameters) and demand sets (i.e., load-
ing combinations). Chapter 5 identifies code-specific algorithms used
by CSiBridge in completing concrete box girder bridges. Chapter 6
provides code-specific algorithms used by CSiBridge in completing
concrete box and multicell box girder bridges. Chapter 7 describes
code-speicifc design parameters for precast I and U girder. Chapter 8
explains how to design and optimize a steel I-beam bridge with com-
posite slab in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 2008 Edition, Section
6 or Appendix A. Chapter 9 describes how to run a Design Request us-
ing an example that applies the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code, and Chap-
ter 10 describes design output for the example in Chapter 9, which can
be presented graphically as plots, in data tables, and in reports generat-
ed using the Advanced Report Writer feature.
1.2 Recommended Reading/Practice
It is strongly recommended that you read this manual and review any applica-
ble Watch & Learn Series tutorials, which are found on our web site,
http://www.csiberkeley.com, before attempting to design a concrete box girder
or precast concrete bridge using CSiBridge. Additional information can be
found in the on-line Help facility available from within the softwares main
menu.

ASHTO LRFD 2007 2 - 1
Chapter 2
Define Loads and Load Combinations
This chapter describes the steps that are necessary to define the loads and load
combinations that the user intends to use in the design of the bridge superstruc-
ture. The user may define the load combinations manually or have CSiBridge
automatically generate the code generated load combinations. The appropriate
design code may be selected using the Design/Rating > Superstructure De-
sign > Preference command. Currently, the AASHTO STD 2002 and AASH-
TO LRFD 2007 design codes (Section 2.1), the CAN/CSA-S6-06 code for
concrete bridges only (Section 2.2), and Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN
1992-2:2005 code (Section 3.3) are supported by CSiBridge.
For referring to pertinent sections of the corresponding code, a unique prefix is
assigned for each code.
Reference to the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code is identified with the prefix
AASHTO.
Reference to the CAN/CSA S6-06 code is identified with the prefix
CSA.
Reference to the Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005
code is identified as EN 1992-1-1.
When the code generated load combinations are going to be used, it is impor-
tant for users to define the load pattern type in accordance with the applicable
2 - 2 ASHTO LRFD 2007
code. The load pattern type can be defined using the Loads > Load Patterns
command. The user options for defining the load pattern types are summarized
in the Tables 2-1 and 2-2 for the AASHTO LRFD code, Tables 2-5 and 2-6 for
the CAN/CSA-S6-06 code, and Table 2-9 and 2-10 for Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-
1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005.
2.1 ASHTO LRFD 2007
2.1.1 Load Pattern Types
Tables 2-1 and 2-2 show the permanent and transient load pattern types that
can be defined in CSiBridge. The tables also show the AASHTO abbreviation
and the load pattern descriptions. Users may choose any name to identify a
load pattern type.
Table 2-1 PERMANENT Load Pattern Types Used in the AASHTO-LRFD 2007 Code
CSiBridge
Load Pattern Type
AASHTO
Reference Description of Load Pattern
CREEP CR Force effects due to creep
DOWNDRAG DD Downdrag force
DEAD DC Dead load of structural components and non-
structural attachments
SUPERDEAD DW Superimposed dead load of wearing surfaces
and utilities
BRAKING BR Vehicle braking force
HORIZ. EARTH PR EH Horizontal earth pressures
LOCKED IN EL Misc. locked-in force effects resulting from the
construction process
EARTH SURCHARGE ES Earth surcharge loads
VERT. EARTH PR EV Vertical earth pressure
PRESTRESS PS Hyperstatic forces from post-tensioning

Table 2-2 TRANSIENT Load Pattern Types Used in the AASHTO LRFD 2007 Design Code
CSiBridge
Load Pattern Type
AASHTO
BRAKING BR Vehicle braking force
CENTRIFUGAL CE Vehicular centrifugal loads
VEHICLE COLLISION CT Vehicular collision force
VESSEL COLLISION CV Vessel collision force
Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations
Table 2-2 TRANSIENT Load Pattern Types Used in the AASHTO LRFD 2007 Design Code
CSiBridge
Load Pattern Type
AASHTO
QUAKE EQ Earthquake
FRICTION FR Friction effects
ICE IC Ice loads
- IM Vehicle Dynamic Load Allowance
BRIDGE LL LL Vehicular live load
LL SURCHARGE LS Live load surcharge
PEDESTRIAN LL PL Pedestrian live load
SETTLEMENT SE Force effects due settlement
TEMP GRADIENT TG Temperature gradient loads
TEMPERATURE TU Uniform temperature effects
STEAM FLOW WA Water load and steam pressure
WINDLIVE LOAD WL Wind on live load
WIND WS Wind loads on structure
2.1.2 Design Load Combinations
The code generated design load combinations make use of the load pattern
types noted in Tables 2-1 and 2-2. Table 2-3 shows the load factors and combi-
nations that are required in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code.
Table 2-3 Load Combinations and Load Factors Used in the AASHTO LRFD 2007 Code
Load
Combo
Limit
State
DC
DD
DW
EH
EV
ES
EL
PS
CR
SH

LL
IM
CE
BR
PL
LS

WA

WS

WL

FR

TU

TG

SE

EQ

IC

CT

CV
Str I P 1.75 1.00 - - 1.00 0.5/1.20 TG SE - - - -
Str II P 1.35 1.00 - - 1.00 0.5/1.20 TG SE - - - -
Str III P - 1.00 1.40 - 1.00 0.5/1.20 TG SE - - - -
Str IV P - 1.00 - - 1.00 0.5/1.20 - - - - -
Str V P 1.35 1.00 0.40 1.00 1.00 0.5/1.20 TG SE - - - -
Ext Ev I P EQ 1.00 - - 1.00 - - 1.00 - - -
2 - 4 ASHTO LRFD 2007
Table 2-3 Load Combinations and Load Factors Used in the AASHTO LRFD 2007 Code
Load
Combo
Limit
State
DC
DD
DW
EH
EV
ES
EL
PS
CR
SH

LL
IM
CE
BR
PL
LS

WA

WS

WL

FR

TU

TG

SE

EQ

IC

CT

CV
Ext Ev II P 0.5 1.00 - - 1.00 - - - 1.00 1.00 1.00
Serv I 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.30 1.00 1.00 0.5/1.20 TG SE - - - -
Serv II 1.00 1.30 1.00 - - 1.00 0.5/1.20 - - - - -
Serv III 1.00 0.80 1.00 - - 1.00 0.5/1.20 TG SE - - - -
Serv IV 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.70 - 1.00 0.5/1.20 - 1.00 - - - -
Fatigue-
LL, IM &
CE Only
- 0.75 - - - - - - - - - - -

Table 2-4 shows the maximum and minimum factors for the permanent loads
in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code.
Table 2-4 Load Factors for Permanent Loads,
P
, Used in the AASHTO LRFD 2007 Code
Type of Load
Load Factor
Maximum Minimum
DC
DC: Strength IV only
1.25
1.50
0.90
0.90
DD: Downdrag 1.40 0.25
DW: Wearing Surfaces and Utilities 1.50 0.65
EH: Horizontal Earth Pressure 1.50 0.90
EL: Locked in Construction Stresses 1.00 1.00
EV: Vertical Earth Pressure 1.35 1.00
ES: Earth Surcharge 1.50 0.75

Two combinations for each permanent load pattern are required because of the
maximum and minimum factors. When the default load combinations are used,
CSiBridge automatically creates both load combinations (one for the maximum
and one for the minimum factor), and then automatically creates a third combi-
nation that represents an enveloped combination of the max/min combos.
2.1.3 Default Load Combinations
Default design load combinations can be activated using the Design/Rating >
Load Combinations > Add Default command. Users can set the load combi-
nations by selecting the Bridge option. Users may select the desired limit
states and load cases using the Code Generated Load Combinations for Bridge
Design form. The form shown in Figure 2-1 illustrates the options when the
AASHTO LRFD 2007 code has been selected for design.

Figure 2-1 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design Form
AASHTO LRFD
After the desired limit states and load cases have been selected, CSiBridge will
generate all of the code-required load combinations. These can be viewed us-
ing the Home > Display > Show Tables command or by using the
Show/Modify button on the Define Combinations form, which is shown in
Figure 2-2.
2 - 6 CAN/CSA-S6-06

Figure 2-2 Define Load Combinations Form AASHTO LRFD
The load combinations denoted as Str-I1, Str-I2, and so forth refer to Strength I
load combinations. The load case StrIGroup1 is the name given to enveloped
load combination of all of the Strength I combinations. Enveloped load combi-
nations will allow for some efficiency later when the bridge design requests are
defined (see Chapter 4).
2.2 CAN/CSA-S6-06
Tables 2-5 and 2-6 show the permanent, transient, and exceptional load pattern
types that can be defined in CSiBridge. The tables also show the CSA abbrevi-
ation and the load pattern descriptions. Users may choose any name to identify
a load pattern type.
Table 2-5 PERMANENT Load Pattern Types Used in the CAN/CSA-S6-06 Code
CSiBridge
Load Pattern Type CSA Description of Load Pattern
CREEP K Force effects due to creep
DEAD D Dead load of structural components and non-
structural attachments
CAN/CSA-S6-06 2 - 7
Table 2-5 PERMANENT Load Pattern Types Used in the CAN/CSA-S6-06 Code
CSiBridge
HORIZ. EARTH PR E Horizontal earth pressures
EARTH SURCHARGE E Earth surcharge loads
PRESTRESS P Hyperstatic forces from post-tensioning

Table 2-6 TRANSIENT Load Pattern Types Used in the CAN/CSA-S6-06 Design Code
CSiBridge
VEHICLE COLLISION H Vehicular collision force
VESSEL COLLISION H Vessel collision force
QUAKE EQ Earthquake
FRICTION K Friction effects
ICE F Ice loads
- IM Vehicle Dynamic Load Allowance
BRIDGE LL L Vehicular live load
SETTLEMENT S Force effects due settlement
TEMP GRADIENT K Temperature gradient loads
TEMPERATURE K Uniform temperature effects
STEAM FLOW F Water load and steam pressure
WINDLIVE LOAD V Wind on live load
WIND W Wind loads on structure
2.2.2 Design Load Combinations
The code generated design load combinations make use of the load pattern
types noted in Tables 2-5 and 2-6. Table 2-7 shows the load factors and com-
binations that are required in accordance with the CAN/CSA-S6-06 code.
Table 2-7 Load Combinations and Load Factors Used in the CAN/CSA-S6-06 Code
Permanent Loads Transitory Loads Exceptional Loads
Loads D E P L
1
K W V S EQ F A H
Fatigue limit state
FLS Combination 1 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 - 8 CAN/CSA-S6-06
Table 2-7 Load Combinations and Load Factors Used in the CAN/CSA-S6-06 Code
Permanent Loads Transitory Loads Exceptional Loads
Loads D E P L
1
K W V S EQ F A H
Serviceability limit
states
SLS Combination 1 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.90 0.80 0 0 1.00 0 0 0 0
SLS Combination 2
2
0 0 0 0.90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ultimate limit
states
3

ULS Combination 1 D E P 1.70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ULS Combination 2 D E P 1.60 1.15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ULS Combination 3 D E P 1.40 1.00 0.50
4
0.50 0 0 0 0 0
ULS Combination 4 D E P 0 1.25 1.65
4
0 0 0 0 0 0
ULS Combination 5 D E P 0 0 0 0 0 1.00 0 0 0
ULS Combination 6
5
D E P 0 0 0 0 0 0 1.30 0 0
ULS Combination 7 D E P 0 0 0.90
4
0 0 0 0 1.30 0
ULS Combination 8 D E P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1.00
ULS Combination 9 1.35 E P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 For the construction live load factor, see CSA Clause 3.16.3.
2. For superstructure vibration only.
3. For ultimate limit states, the maximum or minimum values of specified in Table CSA Table 3.2 shall be used.
4. For wind loads determined from wind tunnel tests, the load factors shall be specified in CSA Clause 3.10.5.2.
5. For long spans, it is possible that a combination of ice load F and wind load W will require investions.

Table 2-8 shows the maximum and minimum factors for the permanent loads
in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code. Table 2-4b shows the
maximum and minimum factors for the permanent loads in accordance with the
CAN/CSA-S6-06 code.
Table 2-8 Load Factors for Permanent Loads, Earth Pressure, and Hydrostatic Pressure
and Prestress, E and P Used in the CAN/CSA-S6-06 Code
Dead Load Maximum D Minimum D
Factory-produced components, excluding wood 1.10 0.95
Cast-in-place concrete, wood, and all non-structural compo-
nents
1.20 0.90
Wearing surfaces, based on nominal or specified thickness 1.50 0.65
Earth fill, negative skin friction on piles 1.25 0.80
Water 1.10 0.90
CAN/CSA-S6-06 2 - 9
Table 2-8 Load Factors for Permanent Loads, Earth Pressure, and Hydrostatic Pressure
and Prestress, E and P Used in the CAN/CSA-S6-06 Code
Dead load in combination with earthquakes Maximum D Minimum D
All dead loads for ULS Combination 5 (see CSA Table 3.1) 1.25 0.80
Earth pressure and hydrostatic pressure Maximum E Minimum E
Passive earth pressure, considered as a load
1.25 0.50
At-rest earth pressure
Active earth pressure
Backfill pressure
Hydrostatic pressure
Prestress
Maximum P Minimum P
Secondary prestress effects 1.05 0.95
Two combinations for each permanent load pattern are required because of the
maximum and minimum factors. When the default load combinations are used,
CSiBridge automatically creates both load combinations (one for the maximum
and one for the minimum factor), and then automatically creates a third combi-
nation that represents an enveloped combination of the max/min combos.
Default design load combinations can be activated using the Design/Rating >
Load Combinations > Add Default command. Users can set the load combi-
nations by selecting the Bridge option. Users may select the desired limit
CAN/CSA-S6-06 code has been selected for design.

2 - 10 CAN/CSA-S6-06

Figure 2-3 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design form CAN/CSA-
S6-06
After the desired limit states and load cases have been selected, CSiBridge will
generate all of the code-required load combinations. These can be viewed us-
ing the Home > Display > Show Tables command or by using the
Show/Modify button on the Define Combinations form, which is shown in
Figure 2-4.
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 2 - 11

Figure 2-4 Define Load Combinations form CAN/CSA-S6-06
The load combinations denoted as ULS1-1, ULS1-2, and so forth refer to Ulti-
mate I load combinations. The load case ULS1Group1 is the name given to en-
veloped load combination of all of the Ultimate I combinations. Enveloped
load combinations will allow for some efficiency later when the bridge design
requests are defined (see Chapter 4).

2.3 Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005
Table 2-9 Permanent Actions, Table 2-10 Prestress and Table 2-11 Variable
Actions show the load pattern type and Eurocode description as well as the Eu-
rocode abbreviation. Users may choose any name to identify a load pattern
type
2 - 12 Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005
Table 2-9 Permanent Actions
CSiBridge
Load Pattern Type
Eurocode
Abbreviations Description of Load Pattern
General Permanent Actions General Permanent Actions
DEAD G
DEADMANUFACTURE G
DEADWEARING G
Geotechnical Permanent Actions Geotechnical Permanent Actions
DEADWATER Ggeo
DOWNDRAG Ggeo
VERTICALEARTHPRESSURE Ggeo
Uneven Settlements - Linear analysis Uneven Settlements - Linear analysis
SETTLEMENT Gset_L

Table 2-10 Prestress
CSiBridge
Load Pattern Type
Eurocode
Prestress PT Prestress
PRESTRESS

Table 2-11 Variable Actions
CSiBridge
Load Pattern Type
Eurocode
Traffic Actions
EURO LOADMODEL1 CHARACTER LM1_Char Load Model 1 with combination of
Tandem System and UDL system
without introducing psi factor
EURO LOADMODEL1 FREQUENT LM1_Freq Load Model 1 with combination of
Tandem System and UDL system
introducing psi factors
EURO LOADMODEL2 LM2 Load Model 2
PEDESTRIANLL FCT Footway and Cycle Tracks
PEDESTRIANLLREDUCED FCTr Footway and Cycle Tracks reduced
value
Horizontal Traffic Actions
BRAKING HTA Traction and Braking
CENTRIFUGAL C Centrifugal Force
Other Actions
WIND W Wind Load
WINDONLIVELOAD Wt Wind with Traffic
TEMPERATURE T
TEMPERATUREGRADIENT TG
SNOW S Snow with H < 1000m
SNOWHIGHALTITUDE S Snow with H > 1000m
CONSTRUCTION C Construction load
Table 2-11 Variable Actions
CSiBridge
Load Pattern Type
Eurocode
Geotechnical Variable Actions Geotechnical Variable Actions
HORIZONTALEARTHPRESSURE Qgeo
BOUYANCY Qgeo
WATERLOADPRESSURE Qgeo
EARTHHYDROSTATIC Qgeo
EARTHSURCHARGE Qgeo
ACTIVEEARTHPRESSURE Qgeo
Earthquake Load
QUAKE E
Accidental loads
IMPACT A
VEHICLECOLLISION A
VESSELCOLLISION A

2.3.2 Design Combinations
Table 2-12 Permanent Actions, Table 2-10 Prestress and Table 2-11 Variable
Actions show the load pattern type and Eurocode description as well as the Eu-
rocode abbreviation. Users may choose any name to identify a load pattern
type
1. Combination Groups
Table 2-12 Ultimate Limit State Design Situation
Combination Group Abbreviation
Persistent and Transient EQU (A)
Combinations of actions in persistent and transient design situations
from Eq. 6.10 with the partial factors specified in Table A2.4(A)
EQU

Persistent and Transient EQU+STR (A)
from Eq. 6.10 with the partial factors specified in Table A2.4(A) NOTE
2
EQU+STR
Persistent and Transient STR/GEO (B1)
from Eq. 6.10 with the partial factors specified in Table A2.4(B) (first
table)
STR/GEO-B1
Table 2-12 Ultimate Limit State Design Situation
Persistent and Transient STR/GEO (B2-a)
from Eq. 6.10 with the partial factors specified in Table A2.4(B)
(second table)
STR/GEO-B2-a
Persistent and Transient STR/GEO (B2-b)
from Eq. 6.10 with the partial factors specified in Table A2.4(B)
(second table)
STR/GEO-B2-b
Persistent and Transient STR/GEO (C)
from Eq. 6.10 with the partial factors specified in Table A2.4(C)
STR/GEO-C
Persistent and Transient STR/GEO (C) + Factors (B)
from Eq. 6.10 with the partial factors specified in Table A2.4(C) for
geotechnical actions and Table A2.4 (B) for non geotechnical actions.
STR/GEO-C+B
Seismic
Combinations of actions for seismic design situations Eq. 6.12
SEIS
Accidental
Combinations of actions for accidental design situations Eq. 6.11
ACC

Table 2-13 Serviceability Limit State design situation

Characteristic
Characteristic combination of actions Eq.6.14
CARAC
Frequent
Frequent combination of actions Eq. 6.15
FREQ
Quasi-permanent
Quasi-permanent combination of actions Eq. 6.16
QUASI

Table 2-14 Combination Factors (Ref. Table A2.1)
0 : Used for combination of variable action
1 : Used for combination of frequent value of variable action
2 : Used for combination for quasi-permanent value of variable action
Load Name 0 1 2
Load Model 1 Tandem System 0.75 0.75 0.0
Load Model 1 UDL System 0.4 0.4 0.0
Load Model 2 0.0 0.75 0.0
Load Model 3 0.0 0.0 0.0
Load Model 4 0.0 0.75 0.0
Footways and Cycle Tracks 0.0 0.0 0.0
Footways and Cycle Tracks reduced value 0.4 0.4 0.0
Wind (Persistent design situations) 0.6 0.2 0.0
Wind with traffic 0.0 0.0 0.0
Snow H < 1000 m 0.7 0.5 0.0
Snow H > 1000 m 0.7 0.5 0.2
Thermal action (Temperature) 0.6 0.6 0.5
Construction Loads 1.0 1.0

Table 2-15 Partial Factors
Load Name EQU EQU + STR
STR/
GEO-B1
STR/
GEO-B2a
STR/
GEO-B2b
STR/
GEO-C
STR/
GEO-C+B
SEIS, ACC
CARAC,
FREQ,
QUAS
max min max min max min max min max min max min max min
General Perma-
nent Actions 1.05 0.95 1.35 1.15 1.35 1 1.15 1 1 1 1.35 1 1 1
Geotechnical
Permanent Actions
1.05 0.95 1.35 1.15 1.35 1 1.15 1 1 1 1.35 1 1 1
Uneven Settle-
ments - Linear
analysis
1.05 0.95 1.35 1.15 1.20 0 1.02 0 1 0 1.20 0 1 0
Prestress
P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

1 1
Traffic Actions 1.35 0 1.35 0 1.35 0 1.35 0 1.15 0 1.50 0 1 0
Horizontal Traffic
Actions
1.35 0 1.35 0 1.35 0 1.35 0 1.15 0 1.50 0 1 0
Other Actions 1.50 0 1.50 0 1.50 0 1.50 0 1.30 0 1.50 0 1 0
Geotechnical
Variable Actions
1.50 0 1.50 0 1.50 0 1.50 0 1.30 0 1.30 0 1 0
Seismic 1 1
Accidental
1 1

Tables 2-16 Load Combinations
A. For (1) EQU, (2) EQU+STR, (3) STR/GEO-B2b, (4) STR/GEO-C, (5) STR/GEO-C+B and (6) CARAC (Characteristic)
(EN1990, Eq. 6.10, 6.10b and 6.14)
Leading Variable
Actions G PT LM1-c LM1-f LM2 LM3 LM4 FCT FCTr HTA W Wt T N Qgeo E A
1. gr1a 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
2. gr1b 1 1 1
3. gr2 1 1 1 1 0 0
4. gr3 1 1 1 0 0
5. gr4 1 1 1 1 0 0
6. gr5 1 1 1 0 0
7. W 1 1 1 0 0 0
8. Wt, required: gr1a 1 1 1 0 0 0
9. T 1 1 0 1 0 0
10. T, required: gr1a 1 1 1 0 1 0
11. Qgeo 1 1 0 0 0 1
12. Qgeo, required:
gr1a 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
13. N 1 1 0 0 1 0
Note: 1. Bold characters indicate that the possibility of non-existence of the associated load group will be considered.
2. If the leading action is not involved in a load combination, the corresponding load combination will not be gen-
erated

B. For (1) STR/GEO-B1 and(2) STR/GEO-B2a (EN1990, Eq. 6.10)
Leading Variable
1. Required: gr1a 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0

C. For QUAS (EN1990, 6.16)
Leading Variable
1. Required: gr1a 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
1 1 2 2 2 2

D. For SEIS (EN1990, Eq. 6.12)
Leading Variable
E 1 1 0 0 0 1


E. For ACC (EN1990, Eq. 6.11)
Main Variable Actions G PT LM1-c LM1-f LM2 LM3 LM4 FCT FCTr HTA W Wt T N Qgeo E A
1. A 1 1 2 2 2 1
2. gr1a 1 1 1 2 2 1
3. gr1b 1 1 1 1
4. gr4 1 1 1 2 2 1
5. W 1 1 1 2 2 2 1
6. T 1 1 2 2 1
7. Qgeo 1 1 2 2 2 1
8. N 1 1 2 1 2 1

F. For FREQ (EN1990, Eq. 6.15)
Leading Variable
1. gr1a 1 1 1 2 2 0
2. gr1b 1 1 1
3. gr4 1 1 1 2 2
4. W 1 1 1 2 2 2
5. T 1 1 2 2
6. Qgeo 1 1 2 1
7. N 1 1 2 1 2

Default design load combinations can be activated using the Design/Rating
>Load Combinations > Add Default command. Users can set the load com-
binations by selecting the Bridge option. Users may select the desired limit
Eurocode code has been selected for design.

Figure 2-5 Define Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design form
Eurocode


Figure 2-6 Define Load Combination form - Eurocode

The load combinations denoted as EQU-1, EQU-2, and so forth refer to Persis-
tent and Transient load combinations 1 and 2. The load case EQUGroup1 is the
name given to enveloped load combination of all of the EQU Persistent and
Transient combinations. Enveloped load combinations will allow for some ef-
ficiency later when the bridge design requests are defined (see Chapter 4).

AASHTO LRFD 2007 3 - 1
Chapter 3
Determine Live Load Distribution Factors
This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge to determine the live
load distribution factors used to assign live load demands to individual girders.
An explanation is given with respect to how the distribution factors are applied
in a shear, stress, and moment check in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD
2007 code (Section 3.1), the CAN/CSA-S6-06 code (Section 3.2), and the Eu-
rocode 2 EN 1992-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 code (Section 3.3).
AASHTO.
CSA.
Reference to the Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 code
is identified as EN 1992-1-1.
For the AASHTO LRFD and CAN/CSA-S6-06 codes, the live load distribution
factors are applicable only to superstructures with a deck that includes precast I
or U girders with composite slabs. For Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1:2004 and EN
1992-2:2005 code, the live load distribution factors are applicable to super-

3 - 2 AASHTO LRFD 2007
structures with a deck that includes multi-cell concrete box, precast I or U gird-
ers with composite slabs, or steel I girders with composite slabs.
3.1 AASHTO LRFD 2007
This section explains the how the live load distribution factors are applied in a
shear, stress, and moment check in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD 2007
code.
Legend:
Girder =beam +tributary area of composite slab
Section Cut =all girders present in the cross-section at the cut location
3.1.1 Algorithmfor Determining Live Load Distribution Fac-
tors (LLDF)
CSiBridge gives the user a choice of four methods to address distribution of
live load to individual girders.
Method 1 The LLD factors are specified directly by the user.
Method 2 CSiBridge calculates the LLD factors by following procedures
outlined in AASHTO LRFD Section 4.6.2.2.
Method 3 CSiBridge reads the calculated live load demands directly from in-
dividual girders (available only for Area models).
Method 4 CSiBridge distributes the live load uniformly to all girders.
It is important to note that to obtain relevant results, the definition of a Moving
Load case must be adjusted depending on which method is selected.
When the LLD factors are user specified or specified in accordance with the
code (Method 1 or 2), only one lane with a MultiLane Scale Factor =1
should be loaded into a Moving Load cases included in the demand set com-
binations.
When CSiBridge reads the LLD factors directly from individual girders (Me-
thod 3, applicable to area and solid models only) or when CSiBridge applies
Chapter 3 - Determine Live Load Distribution Factors
the LLD factors uniformly (Method 4), multiple traffic lanes with relevant
Multilane Scale Factors should be loaded in accordance with code require-
ments.
3.1.2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors
At every section cut, the following geometric information is evaluated to de-
termine the LLD factors.
span lengththe length of span for which moment or shear is being calcu-
lated
the number of girders
girder designationthe first and last girder are designated as exterior girders
and the other girders are classified as interior girders
roadway widthmeasured as the distance between curbs/barriers; medians
are ignored
overhangconsists of the horizontal distance from the centerline of the exte-
rior web of the left exterior beam at deck level to the interior edge of the curb
or traffic barrier
the beamsincludes the area, moment of inertia, torsion constant, center of
gravity
the thickness of the composite slab t1 and the thickness of concrete slab
haunch t2
the tributary area of the composite slabwhich is bounded at the interior
girder by the midway distances to neighboring girders and at the exterior
girder; includes the entire overhang on one side, and is bounded by the mid-
way distances to neighboring girder on the other side
Youngs modulus for both the slab and the beamsangle of skew support.
CSiBridge then evaluates the longitudinal stiffness parameter, Kg, in accor-
dance with AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2 (eq. 4.6.2.2.1-1). The center of gravity of
the composite slab measured from the bottom of the beam is calculated as the
sum of the beam depth, thickness of the concrete slab haunch t2, and one-half

the thickness of the composite slab t1. Spacing of the girders is calculated as
the average distance between the centerlines of neighboring girders.
CSiBridge then verifies that the selected LLD factors are compatible with the
type of model: spine, area, or solid. If the LLD factors are read by CSiBridge
directly from the individual girders, the model type must be area or solid. This
is the case because with the spine model option, CSiBridge models the entire
cross section as one frame element and there is no way to extract forces on in-
dividual girders. All other model types and LLDF method permutations are al-
lowed.
3.1.3 Apply LLD Factors
The application of live load distribution factors varies, depending on which
method has been selected: user specified; in accordance with code; directly
from individual girders; or uniformly distributed onto all girders.
3.1.3.1 User Specified
When this method is selected, CSiBridge reads the girder designations (i.e.,
exterior and interior) and assigns live load distribution factors to the individual
girders accordingly.
3.1.3.2 Calculated by CSiBridge in Accordance with AASHTO
LRFD 2007
When this method is selected, CSiBridge considers the data input by the user
for truck wheel spacing, minimum distance from wheel to curb/barrier and
multiple presence factor for one loaded lane.
Depending on the section type, CSiBridge validates several section parameters
against requirements specified in the code (AASHTO LRFD Tables 4.6.2.2.2b-
1, 4.6.2.2.2d-1, 4.6.2.2.3a-1 and 4.6.2.2.3b-1). When any of the parameter val-
ues are outside the range required by the code, the section cut is excluded from
the Design Request.
At every section cut, CSiBridge then evaluates the live load distribution factors
for moment and shear for exterior and interior girders using formulas specified
in the code (AASHTO LRFD Tables 4.6.2.2.2b-1, 4.6.2.2.2d-1, 4.6.2.2.3a-1
and 4.6.2.2.3b-1). After evaluation, the LLDF values are assigned to individual
girders based on their designation (exterior, interior). The same value equal to
the average of the LLDF calculated for the left and right girders is assigned to
both exterior girders. Similarly, all interior girders use the same LLDF equal to
the average of the LLDF of all of the individual interior girders.
3.1.3.3 Forces Read Directly fromGirders
When this method is selected, CSiBridge sets the live load distribution factor
for all girders to 1.
3.1.3.4 Uniformly Distributed to Girders
When this method is selected, the live load distribution factor is equal to 1/n
where n is the number of girders in the section. All girders have identical LLD
factors disregarding their designation (exterior, interior) and demand type
(shear, moment).
3.1.4 Generate Virtual Combinations
When the method for determining the live load distribution factors is user-
specified, code-specified, or uniformly distributed (Methods 1, 2 or 4), CSi-
Bridge generates virtual load combination for every valid section cut selected
for design. The virtual combinations are used during a stress check and check
of the shear and moment to calculate the forces on the girders. After those
forces have been calculated, the virtual combination are deleted. The process is
repeated for all section cuts selected for design.
Four virtual COMBO cases are generated for each COMBO that the user has
specified in the Design Request (see Chapter 4). The program analyzes the de-
sign type of each load case present in the user specified COMBO and multip-
lies all non-moving load case types by 1/ n (where n is the number of girders)
and the moving load case type by the section cut values of the LLD factors (ex-
terior moment, exterior shear, interior moment and interior shear LLD factors).
This ensures that dead load is shared evenly by all girders, while live load is
distributed based on the LLD factors.

The program then completes a stress check and a check of the shear and the
moment for each section cut selected for design.
3.1.4.1 Stress Check
At the Section Cut being analyzed, the girder stresses at all stress output points
are read from CSiBridge for every virtual COMBO generated. To ensure that
live load demands are shared equally irrespective of lane eccentricity by all
girders, CSiBridge uses averaging when calculating the girder stresses. It cal-
culates the stresses on a beam by integrating axial and M3 moment demands on
all the beams in the entire section cut and dividing the demands by the number
of girders. Similarly, P and M3 forces in the composite slab are integrated and
stresses are calculated in the individual tributary areas of the slab by dividing
the total slab demand by the number of girders.
When stresses are read from analysis into design, the stresses are multiplied by
n (where n is number of girders) to make up for the reduction applied in the
Virtual Combinations.
3.1.4.2 Shear or Moment Check
At the Section Cut being analyzed, the entire section cut forces are read from
CSiBridge for every Virtual COMBO generated. The forces are assigned to in-
dividual girders based on their designation. (Forces from two virtual Combina-
tionsone for shear and one for momentgenerated for exterior beam are as-
signed to both exterior beams, and similarly, Virtual Combinations for interior
beams are assigned to interior beams.)
3.1.5 Read Forces/Stresses Directly fromGirders
When the method for determining the live load distribution is based on forces
read directly from the girders, the method varies based on which Design Check
has been specified in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).
are read from CSiBridge for every COMBO specified in the Design Request.
CSiBridge calculates the stresses on a beam by integrating axial, M3 and M2
moment demands on the beam at the center of gravity of the beam. Similarly P,
M3 and M2 demands in the composite slab are integrated at the center of gravi-
ty of the slab tributary area.
At the Section Cut being analyzed, the girder forces are read from CSiBridge
for every COMBO specified in the Design Request. CSiBridge calculates the
demands on a girder by integrating axial, M3 and M2 moment demands on the
girder at the center of gravity of the girder.
3.1.6 LLDF Design Example Using Method 2
The AASHTO-LRFD Specifications allow the use of advanced methods of
analysis to determine the live load distribution factors. However, for typical
bridges, the specifications list equations to calculate the distribution factors for
different types of bridge superstructures. The types of superstructures covered
by these equations are described in AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.1-1. From
this table, bridges with concrete decks supported on precast concrete I or bulb-
tee girders are designated as cross-section K. Other tables in AASHTO
LRFD 4.6.2.2.2 list the distribution factors for interior and exterior girders in-
cluding cross-section K.
The distribution factor equations are largely based on work conducted in the
NCHRP Project 12-26 and have been verified to give accurate results com-
pared to 3-dimensional bridge analysis and field measurements. The multiple
presence factors are already included in the distribution factor equations except
when the tables call for the use of the lever rule. In these cases, the computa-
tions need to account for the multiple presence factors. The user is providing
those as part of the Design Request definition together with wheel spacing,
curb to wheel distance and lane width.
Notice that the distribution factor tables include a column with the heading
range of applicability. The ranges of applicability listed for each equation are
based on the range for each parameter used in the study leading to the devel-
opment of the equation. When any of the parameters exceeds the listed value in

the range of applicability column, CSiBridge reports the incompliance and
excludes the section from design.
AASHTO LRFD Article 4.6.2.2.2d of the specifications states: In beam-slab
bridge cross-sections with diaphragms or cross-frames, the distribution factor
for the exterior beam shall not be taken less than that which would be obtained
by assuming that the cross-section deflects and rotates as a rigid cross-section.
This provision was added to the specifications because the original study that
developed the distribution factor equations did not consider intermediate diaph-
ragms. Application of this provision requires the presence of a sufficient num-
ber of intermediate diaphragms whose stiffness is adequate to force the cross
section to act as a rigid section. For prestressed girders, different jurisdictions
use different types and numbers of intermediate diaphragms. Depending on the
number and stiffness of the intermediate diaphragms, the provisions of AASH-
TO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d may not be applicable. If the user specifies option Yes
in the Diaphragms Present option the program follows the procedure outlined
in the provision AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d.
For this example, one deep reinforced concrete diaphragm is located at the
midspan of each span. The stiffness of the diaphragm was deemed sufficient to
force the cross-section to act as a rigid section; therefore, the provisions of
AASHTO LRFD S4.6.2.2.2d apply.

Figure 3-1 General Dimensions
Required information:
AASHTO Type I-Beam (28/72)
Noncomposite beam area, A
g
=1,085 in
2

Noncomposite beam moment of inertia, I
g
=733,320 in
4

Deck slab thickness, t
s
=8 in.
Span length, L =110 ft.
Girder spacing, S =9 ft.-8 in.
Modulus of elasticity of the beam, E
B
=4,696 ksi
Modulus of elasticity of the deck, E
D
=3,834 ksi
C.G. to top of the basic beam =35.62 in.
C.G. to bottom of the basic beam =36.38 in.
1. Calculate n, the modular ratio between the beam and the deck.
n =
B D
E E (AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.1-2)
=4696 3834 =1.225
2. Calculate e
g
, the distance between the center of gravity of the noncompo-
site beam and the deck. Ignore the thickness of the haunch in determin-
ing e
g

e
g
=NAYT + 2
s
t =35.62 +8 2 =39.62 in.
3. Calculate K
g
, the longitudinal stiffness parameter.
K
g
=
( )
2
g
n I Ae + (4.6.2.2.1-1)
=
( )
2
4
1.225 733320 1085 39.62 2984704in

+ =

4. Interior girder. Calculate the moment distribution factor for an interior
beam with two or more design lanes loaded using AASHTO LRFD Ta-
ble S4.6.2.2.2b-1.
D
M
= ( ) ( ) ( )
0.1
0.6 0.2
3
0.075 9.5 12.0
g s
S S L K Lt +
( ) ( )
( )( )
{ }
0.1
0.6 0.2 3
0.075 9.667 9.5 9.667110 2984704 12 110 8

= +

=0.796 lane (eq. 1)

5. In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2e, a skew correction factor
for moment may be applied for bridge skews greater than 30 degrees.
The bridge in this example is skewed 20 degrees, and therefore, no skew
correction factor for moment is allowed.
Calculate the moment distribution factor for an interior beam with one
design lane loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1.
D
M
= ( ) ( ) ( )
0.1
0.4 0.3
3
0.06 14 12.0
g s
S S L K Lt +
= ( ) ( )
( )( )
{ }
0.1
0.4 0.3 3
0.06 9.66714 9.667110 2984704 12 100 8

+

=0.542 lane (eq. 2)
Notice that the distribution factor calculated above for a single lane
loaded already includes the 1.2 multiple presence factor for a single lane,
therefore, this value may be used for the service and strength limit states.
However, multiple presence factors should not be used for the fatigue
limit state. Therefore, the multiple presence factor of 1.2 for the single
lane is required to be removed from the value calculated above to deter-
mine the factor used for the fatigue limit state.
6. Skew correction factor for shear.
In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.3c, a skew correction factor
for support shear at the obtuse corner must be applied to the distribution
factor of all skewed bridges. The value of the correction factor is calcu-
lated using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3c-1.
S
C
=
( )
0.3
3
1.0 0.20 12.0 tan
s g
Lt K +
=
( )( ) ( )
0.3
3
1.0 0.20 12.0 110 8 2984704 tan20 +
=1.047
7. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an interior beam with two or
more design lanes loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table S4.6.2.2.3a-1.
D
V
= ( ) ( )
2
0.2 12 35 S S +
= ( ) ( )
2
0.2 9.66712 9.667 35 +
=0.929 lane
Apply the skew correction factor:
D
V
=
( )
1.047 0.929 0.973 = lane (eq. 4)
8. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an interior beam with one de-
sign lane loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table S4.6.2.2.3a-1.
D
V
= ( ) 0.36 25.0 S +
= ( ) 0.36 9.667 25.0 +
=0.747 lane
Apply the skew correction factor:
D
V
=
( )
1.047 0.747
=0.782 lane (eq. 5)
9. From (1) and (2), the service and strength limit state moment distribution
factor for the interior girder is equal to the larger of 0.796 and 0.542 lane.
Therefore, the moment distribution factor is 0.796 lane.
From (4) and (5), the service and strength limit state shear distribution
factor for the interior girder is equal to the larger of 0.973 and 0.782 lane.
Therefore, the shear distribution factor is 0.973 lane.
10. Exterior girder
11. Calculate the moment distribution factor for an exterior beam with two
or more design lanes using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1.
D
M
=e
DVinterior

e =0.77 9.1 de +
where de is the distance from the centerline of the exterior girder to the
inside face of the curb or barrier.

e =0.77 +1.83/9.1 =0.97
D
M
=0.97(0.796) =0.772 lane (eq. (7)
12. Calculate the moment distribution factor for an exterior beam with one
design lane using the lever rule in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Ta-
ble 4.6.2.2.2d-1.

Figure 3-2 Lever Rule

D
M
=
( ) [ ] 3.5 6 3.5 9.667 1.344wheels 2 + + =
=0.672 lane (eq. 8)
Notice that this value does not include the multiple presence factor,
therefore, it is adequate for use with the fatigue limit state. For service
and strength limit states, the multiple presence factor for a single lane
loaded needs to be included.
D
M
=
( )
0.672 1.2
=0.806 lane (eq. 9) (Strength and Service)
13. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an exterior beam with two or
more design lanes loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1.
D
V
=e
DVinterior

where:
e =0.6 10 de +
=0.6 1.8310 +
=0.783
D
V
=
( )
0.783 0.973
=0.762 lane (eq. 10)
14. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an exterior beam with one
design lane loaded using the lever rule in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1. This value will be the same as the moment
distribution factor with the skew correction factor applied.
D
V
=
( )
1.047 0.806
=0.845 lane (eq. 12) (Strength and Service)
Notice that AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d includes additional requirements
for the calculation of the distribution factors for exterior girders when the
girders are connected with relatively stiff cross-frames that force the
cross-section to act as a rigid section. As indicated in the introduction,
these provisions are applied to this example; the calculations are shown
below.
15. Additional check for rigidly connected girders (AASHTO LRFD
4.6.2.2.2d)

The multiple presence factor, m, is applied to the reaction of the exterior
beam (AASHTO LRFD Table 3.6.1.1.2-1)
m
1
=1.20
m
2
=1.00
m
3
=0.85
R =
( )
2
L b ext
N N X e x +

(4.6.2.2.2d-1)
where:
R = reaction on exterior beam in terms of lanes
N
L
= number of loaded lanes under consideration
e = eccentricity of a design truck or a design land load from
the center of gravity of the pattern of girders (ft.)
x = horizontal distance from the center of gravity of the pat-
tern of girders to each girder (ft.)
X
ext
= horizontal distance from the center of gravity of the pat-
tern to the exterior girder (ft.) See Figure 1 for dimen-
sions.
One lane loaded (only the leftmost lane applied):
R =
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
2 2 2
16 24.167 21 2 24.1672 14.52 4.8332

+ + +

=0.1667 +0.310
=0.477 (Fatigue)
Add the multiple presence factor of 1.2 for a single lane:
R =
( )
1.2 0.477
=0.572 (Strength)
Two lanes loaded:
R =
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
2 2 2
2 6 24.167 21 9 2 24.1672 14.52 4.8332

+ + + +

=0.333 +0.443
=0.776
Add the multiple presence factor of 1.0 for two lanes loaded:
R =
( )
1.0 0.776
=0.776 (Strength)
Three lanes loaded:
R =
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
2 2 2
3 6 24.167 21 9 3 2 24.1672 14.52 4.8332

+ + + +

=0.5 +0.399
=0.899
Add the multiple presence factor of 0.85 for three or more lanes loaded:
R =
( )
0.85 0.899
=0.764 (Strength)
These values do not control over the distribution factors summarized in
Design Step 16.
16. From (7) and (9), the service and strength limit state moment distribution
factor for the exterior girder is equal to the larger of 0.772 and 0.806
lane. Therefore, the moment distribution factor is 0.806 lane.
From (10) and (12), the service and strength limit state shear distribution
factor for the exterior girder is equal to the larger of 0.762 and 0.845
lane. Therefore, the shear distribution factor is 0.845 lane.


3 - 16 CAN/CSA-S6-06
Table 3.1 Summary of Service and Strength Limit State Distribution Factors --
AASHTO LRFD

Load Case
Moment
interior
beams
Moment
exterior
beams
Shear
interior
beams
Shear
exterior
beams
Distribution factors from
Tables in 4.6.2.2.2
Multiple lanes
loaded
0.796 0.772 0.973 0.762
Single lane loaded 0.542 0.806 0.782 0.845
Additional check for rigidly
connected girders
Multiple lanes
loaded
NA 0.776 NA 0.776
Single lane loaded NA 0.572 NA 0.572
Design Value 0.796 0.806 0.973 0.845
Value reported by CSi-
Bridge
0.796 0.807 0.973 0.845

3.2 CAN/CSA-S6-06
This section describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge to determine the live
load distribution factors used to assign live load demands to individual girders.
An explanation is given with respect to how the distribution factors are applied
in a shear, stress, and moment check in accordance with the CAN/CSA-S6-06
code. The live load distribution factors are applicable only to superstructures
that have a deck that includes multi-cell concrete box, precast I or U girders
with composite slabs.
Legend:
Girder =beam +tributary area of composite slab or web +tributary area of top
and bottom slab
tors (LLDF)
CSiBridge gives the user a choice of four methods to address distribution of
CAN/CSA-S6-06 3 - 17
Method 2 CSiBridge calculates the LLD factors by following procedures
outlined in CAN/CSA-S6-06 Section 5.7.1.
dividual girders (available only for Area or Solid models).
Method 4 CSiBridge distributes the live load uniformly into all girders.
When the LLD factors are user specified or specified in accordance with the
code (Method 1 or 2), only one lane with a MultiLane Scale Factor =1
should be loaded into a Moving Load cases included in the demand set com-
binations. The vehicle classes defined in the moving load case shall comprise
the truck and lane load as defined in CSA clause 5.7.1.2.1.2 or 5.7.1.4.1.2.
When CSiBridge reads the LLD factors directly from individual girders (Me-
thod 3, applicable to area and solid models only) or when CSiBridge applies
the LLD factors uniformly (Method 4), multiple traffic lanes with relevant
Multilane Scale Factors should be loaded in accordance with code require-
ments.
3.2.2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors
At every section cut, the following geometric information is evaluated to de-
termine the LLD factors.
lated. For more information on span length of continuous spans see section
3.3 of this manual.
girder designationthe first and last girder are designated as exterior girders
and the other girders are classified as interior girders
roadway widthmeasured as the distance between curbs/barriers; medians
are ignored

3 - 18 CAN/CSA-S6-06
or traffic barrier
gravity
haunch t2
way distances to neighboring girder on the other side
CSiBridge then evaluates the parameters F and Cf, in accordance with CSA
Table 5.3 and Table 5.7. The center of gravity of the composite slab measured
from the bottom of the beam is calculated as the sum of the beam depth, thick-
ness of the concrete slab haunch t2, and one-half the thickness of the composite
slab t1. Spacing of the girders is calculated as the average distance between the
centerlines of neighboring girders.
CSiBridge then verifies that the selected LLD factors are compatible with the
type of model: spine, area, or solid. If the LLD factors are read by CSiBridge
directly from the individual girders, the model type must be area or solid. This
is the case because with the spine model option, CSiBridge models the entire
cross section as one frame element and there is no way to extract forces on in-
dividual girders. All other model types and LLDF method permutations are al-
lowed.
3.2.3 Moment Region
For continuous spans CSiBridge calculates the span length L in accordance
with CSA clause A5.1.2. Each section cut is assigned two span lengths: one for
M+region and one for M region based on Figure A5.1.1 of the code. For each
demands set specified in the Design Request the program then determines the
moment region type based on the sign of M3 caused by moving load case de-
CAN/CSA-S6-06 3 - 19
sign type present in the demand set. The moment region type is reported in the
results tables.
For non-continuous span both M+and M span length are set equal to true dis-
tance between span supports. Therefore the LLD factors calculated for M+and
M regions are also equal.
method has been selected: user specified; in accordance with code; directly
from individual girders; or uniformly distributed onto all girders.
3.2.4.1 User Specified
When this method is selected, CSiBridge reads the girder designations (i.e., ex-
terior and interior) and assigns live load distribution factors to the individual
3.2.4.2 Calculated by CSiBridge in Accordance with CAN/CSA-
S6-06
When this method is selected, CSiBridge considers the data input by the user
for highway class, number of lanes, and modification factor for multi-lane
loading.
Depending on the section type, CSiBridge validates several section parameters
against requirements specified in the CSA clause 5.7.1.1 of the code. When any
of the parameter values are outside the range required by the code, the section
cut is excluded from the Design Request.
At every section cut, CSiBridge then evaluates the live load distribution factors
for moment and shear, for exterior and interior girders, and for M+and M re-
gions using formulas specified in the code CSA clause 5.7.1.2.1.2 and clause
5.7.1.4.1.2. After evaluation, the LLDF values are assigned to individual gird-
ers based on their designation (exterior, interior). The same value equal to the
average of the LLDF calculated for the left and right girders is assigned to both

3 - 20 CAN/CSA-S6-06
exterior girders. Similarly, all interior girders use the same LLDF equal to the
average of the LLDF of all of the individual interior girders.
3.2.4.3 Forces Read Directly fromGirders
3.2.4.4 Uniformly Distributed to Girders
(shear, moment).
3.2.5 Generate Virtual Combinations
When the method for determining the live load distribution factors is user-
specified, code-specified, or uniformly distributed (Methods 1, 2 or 4), CSi-
Bridge generates virtual load combination for every valid section cut selected
for design. The virtual combinations are used during a stress check and check
of the shear and moment to calculate the forces on the girders. After those
forces have been calculated, the virtual combination are deleted. The process is
repeated for all section cuts selected for design.
Four virtual COMBO cases for each moment region (M+and M) are generat-
ed for each COMBO that the user has specified in the Design Request (see
Chapter 4). The program analyzes the design type of each load case present in
the user specified COMBO and multiplies all non-moving load case types by
1/ n (where n is the number of girders) and the moving load case type by the
section cut values of the LLD factors (exterior moment, exterior shear, interior
moment and interior shear LLD factors). This ensures that dead load is shared
evenly by all girders, while live load is distributed based on the LLD factors.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 3 - 21
dividual girders based on their designation. (For each moment region forces
from two virtual Combinationsone for shear and one for momentgenerated
for exterior beam are assigned to both exterior beams, and similarly, Virtual
Combinations for interior beams are assigned to interior beams.)
3.2.6 Read Forces/Stresses Directly fromGirders

for every COMBO specified in the Design Request. CSiBridge calculates the
demands on a girder by integrating axial, M3 and M2 moment demands on the
girder at the center of gravity of the girder.
Live load distribution factors can be used to control sharing of live load de-
mands by individual girders in spine models that use single frame objects to
model an entire cross-section. The use of live load distribution factors is also
allowed on area and solid object models.
This section describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge when applying the
live load distribution factors used to assign live load demands to individual
girders in accordance with Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-
2:2005. An explanation is given with respect to how the distribution factors are
applied in a shear, stress, and moment check.
Legend:
Girder =beam +tributary area of composite slab or web +tributary area of top
and bottom slab
tors (LLDF)
CSiBridge gives the user a choice of three methods to address distribution of
dividual girders (available only for Area or Solid models).
Method 3 CSiBridge distributes the live load uniformly into all girders.
When the LLD factors are user specified (Method 1), the number of loaded
lanes and MultiLane Scale Factors included in the demand set combinations
should correspond to the assumptions based on which the LLD factor was
derived. (For example when factors based on AASHTO LRFD code are used
only one lane with a MultiLane Scale Factor =1 should be loaded into Mov-
ing Load cases included in the demand set combinations. The vehicle classes
defined in the moving load case shall comprise the truck and lane load as de-
fined in LRFD clause 5.7.1.2.1.2 or 5.7.1.4.1.2.)
When CSiBridge reads the demands directly from individual girders (Method
2, applicable to area and solid models only) or when CSiBridge applies the
LLD factors uniformly (Method 3), multiple traffic lanes with relevant Mul-
tilane Scale Factors should be loaded in accordance with code requirements.
3.3.2 Determination of Live Load Distribution Factors
The Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 codes do not give
specific guidance on how to calculate Live Load Distribution factors for exte-
rior and interior beams. Other bridge codes, such as AASHTO LRFD or
CAN/CSA-S6-06, specify comprehensive methods for determining LLD fac-
tors for various types of cross-sections. The LLD factors typically are depen-
dent on the following parameters:
lated.
girder designationthe first and last girders are designated as exterior gird-
ers and the other girders are classified as interior girders
roadway width and spacing of girders

or traffic barrier
gravity
haunch t2
way distances to the neighboring girder on the other side
If the live load demands are to be read by CSiBridge directly from the individ-
ual girders (Method 2; see the next subsection), the model type must be area or
solid. This is the case because with the spine model option, CSiBridge models
the entire cross-section as one frame element and there is no way to extract
forces on individual girders. All other model types and LLDF method permuta-
tions are allowed.
method has been selected: user specified (Method 1); directly from individual
girders (Method 2); or uniformly distributed onto all girders (Method 3).
3.3.3.1 User Specified (Method 1)
When this method is selected, CSiBridge reads the girder designations (i.e., ex-
terior and interior) and assigns live load distribution factors to the individual
3.3.3.2 Forces Read Directly fromGirders (Method 2)
3.3.3.3 Uniformly Distributed to Girders (Method 3)
(shear, moment).
3.3.4 Generate Virtual Combinations (Methods 1 and 3)
When the method for determining the live load distribution is user-specified or
uniformly distributed (Methods 1 or 3), CSiBridge generates virtual load com-
bination for every valid section cut selected for design. The virtual combina-
tions are used during a stress check and check of the shear and moment to cal-
culate the forces on the girders. After those forces have been calculated, the
virtual combination are deleted. The process is repeated for all section cuts se-
lected for design.
Four virtual COMBO cases are generated for each COMBO that the user has
specified in the Design Request (see Chapter 4). The program analyzes the de-
sign type of each load case present in the user specified COMBO and multip-
lies all non-moving load case types by 1/ n (where n is the number of girders)
and the moving load case type by the section cut values of the LLD factors (ex-
terior moment, exterior shear, interior moment and interior shear LLD factors).
This ensures that dead load is shared evenly by all girders, while live load is
distributed based on the LLD factors.
3.3.4.1 Stress Check (Methods 1 and 3)

3.3.4.2 Shear or Moment Check (Methods 1 and 3)
dividual girders based on their designation. (forces from two virtual Combina-
tions one for shear and one for momentgenerated for exterior beam are
assigned to both exterior beams, and similarly, Virtual Combinations for inte-
rior beams are assigned to interior beams.)
3.3.5 Read Forces/Stresses Directly fromGirders (Method 2)
3.3.5.1 Stress Check (Method 2)
3.3.5.2 Shear or Moment Check (Method 2)
for every COMBO specified in the Design Request (see Chapter 4). CSiBridge
calculates the demands on a girder by integrating axial, M3 and M2 moment
demands on the girder at the center of gravity of the girder.

Name and Bridge Object 4 - 1
Chapter 4
Define a Bridge Design Request
This chapter describes the Bridge Design Request, which is defined using the
Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Design Requests command.
Each Bridge Design Request is unique and specifies which bridge object is to
be designed, the type of check to be performed (e.g., concrete box stress, pre-
cast composite stress, and so on), the station range (i.e., the particular zone or
portion of the bridge that is to be designed), the design parameters (i.e., para-
meters that may be used to overwrite the default values automatically set by the
program) and demand sets (i.e., the load combination[s] to be considered).
Multiple Bridge Design Requests may be defined for the same bridge object.
Before defining a design request, the applicable code should be specified using
the Design/Rating > Superstructure > Preferences command. Currently, the
AASHTO STD 2002, AASHTO LRFD 2007, CAN/CSA-S6-06, and EN 1992-
1-1 codes are available for the design of a concrete box girder, the AASHTO
2007 LRFD, CAN/CSA-S6-06, and EN 1992-1-1 codes are available for the
design of a Precast I or U Beam with Composite Slab, and the AASHTO
LFRD 2007 is available for Steel I-Beam with Composite Slab superstructures.
Figure 4-1 shows the Bridge Design Request form when the bridge object is for
a concrete box girder bridge, and the check type is concrete box stress. Figure
4-2 shows the Bridge Design Request form when the bridge object is for a
Composite I or U girder bridge and the check type is precast composite stress.
4 - 2 Name and Bridge Object
Figure 4-3 shows the Bridge Design Request form when the bridge object is for
a Steel I-Beam bridge and the check type is composite strength.

Figure 4-1 Bridge Design
Request - Concrete Box
Girder Bridges

Figure 4-2 Bridge Design
Request - Composite I or
U Girder Bridges

Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request
Name and Bridge Object 4 - 3

Figure 4-3 Bridge Design Request - Steel I Beam with Composite Slab
4.1 Name and Bridge Object
Each Bridge Design Request must have unique name. Any name can be used.
If multiple Bridge Objects are used to define a bridge model, select the bridge
object to be designed for the Design Request. If a bridge model contains only a
single bridge object, the name of that bridge object will be the only item avail-
able from the Bridge Object drop-down list.
4.2 Check Type
The Check Type refers to the type of design to be performed and the available
options depend on the type of bridge deck being modeled.
For a Concrete Box Girder bridge, CSiBridge provides the following check
type options:
4 - 4 Check Type
AASHTO STD 2002
ConcreteBox Stress
AASHTO LRFD 2007
ConcreteBox Stress
ConcreteBox Flexure
ConcreteBox Shear and Torsion
ConcreteBox Principal
CAN/CSA-S6-06, and EN 1992-1-1
ConcreteBox Stress
ConcreteBox Flexure
ConcreteBox Shear
For Multi-Cell Concrete Box Girder bridge, CSiBridge provides the following
check type options:
AASHTO LRFD 2007, CAN/CSA-S6-06, and EN 1992-1-1
ConcreteBox Stress
ConcreteBox Flexure
ConcreteBox Shear
For bridge models with precast I or U Beams with Composite Slabs, CSi-
Bridge provides three check type options, as follows:
AASHTO LRFD 2007, CAN/CSA-S6-06, and EN 1992-1-1
Precast Comp Stress
Precast Comp Shear
Precast Comp Flexure
Station Range 4 - 5
For bridge models with steel I-beam with composite slab superstructures,
CSiBridge provides the following check type option:
AASHTO LRFD 2007
Steel Comp Strength
Steel Comp Service
Steel Comp Fatigue
Steel Comp Constructability Staged
Steel Comp Constructability NonStaged
The bold type denotes the name that appears in the check type drop-down list.
A detailed description of the design algorithm can be found in Chapter 5 for
concrete box girder bridges, in Chapter 6 for multi-cell box girder bridges, in
Chapter 7 for precast I or U beam with composite slabs, and in Chapter 8 for
steel I-beam with composite slab.
4.3 Station Range
The station range refers to the particular zone or portion of the bridge that is to
be designed. The user may choose the entire length of the bridge, or specify
specific zones using station ranges. Multiple zones (i.e., station ranges) may be
specified as part of a single design request.
When defining a station range, the user specifies the Location Type, which de-
termines if the superstructure forces are to be considered before or at a station
point. The user may choose the location type as before the point, after the
point, or both.
4.4 Design Parameters
Design parameters are overwrites that can be used to change the default values
set automatically by the program. The parameters are specific to each code,
deck type, and check type. Figure 4-4 shows the Superstructure Design Para-
meters form.
4 - 6 Design Parameters

Figure 4-4 Superstructure Design Request Parameters form
Table 4-1 shows the parameters for concrete box girder bridges. Table 4-2
shows the parameters for multi-cell concrete box bridges. Table 4-3 shows the
parameters applicable when the superstructure has a deck that includes precast
I or U girders with composite slabs. Table 4-4 shows the parameters applicable
when the superstructure has a deck that includes steel I-beams.
Table 4-1 Design Request Parameters for Concrete Box Girders
AASHTO STD 2002

Concrete Box Stress
Resistance Factor - multiplies both compression and tension
stress limits
Multiplier on
c
f to calculate the compression stress limit
Multiplier on sqrt(
c
f ) to calculate the tension stress limit,
given in the units specified
The tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or
ksi units for
c
f and the resulting tension limit
Design Parameters 4 - 7
AASHTO LRFD 2007
Concrete Box Stress

Concrete Box Stress, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multip-
lies both compression and tension stress limits
Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit - Multiplier
on
c
Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit Units - Multiplier
on sqrt(
c
f ) to calculate the tension stress limit, given in the
units specified
Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The tension limit
factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi units for
c
f
and the resulting tension limit
Concrete Box Shear Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multip-
Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, Lightweight Resistance Factor
that multiplies nominal shear resistance to obtain factored
resistance for light-weight concrete
Include Resal (Hunching-girder) shear effects Yes or No.
Specifies whether the component of inclined flexural com-
pression or tension, in the direction of the applied shear, in
variable depth members shall or shall not be considered
when determining the design factored shear force in accor-
dance with Article 5.8.6.2.
Concrete Box Shear Rebar Material - A previously defined
rebar material label that will be used to determine the area
of shear rebar required
Longitudinal Torsional Rebar Material - A previously defined
rebar material that will be used to determine the area of lon-
gitudinal torsional rebar required
Concrete Box
Flexure

Concrete Box Flexure, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that mul-
tiplies both compression and tension stress limits
Concrete Box
Principal
See the Box Stress design parameter specifications
CAN/CSA-S6-06
Concrete Box Stress Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit -
Multiplier on
c
Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The
tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi
units for
c
Concrete Box Shear Phi Concrete c -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
Phi PT p -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)

Cracking Strength Factor Multiplies sqrt(
c
f ) to obtain
cracking strength
EpsilonX Negative Limit -- Longitudinal negative strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
EpsilonX Positive Limit -- Longitudinal positive strain limit
Tab slab rebar cover Distance from the outside face of the
top slab to the centerline of the exterior closed transverse
torsion reinforcement
Web rebar cover Distance from the outside face of the web
to the centerline of the exterior closed transverse torsion
reinforcement
Bottom Slab rebar cover Distance from the outside face of
the bottoms lab to the centerline of the exterior closed trans-
verse torsion reinforcement
Shear Rebar Material A previously defined rebar material
label that will be used to determine the required area of
transverse rebar in the girder
Longitudinal Rebar Material A previously defined rebar
material that will be used to determine the required area of
longitudinal rebar in the girder
Concrete Box
Flexure
Phi Concrete c -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
Phi Pt p -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
Phi Rebar s -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)
Eurocode EN 1992
Concrete Box Stress Compression limit Multiplier on f
c
k to calculate the com-
pression stress limit
Tension limit Multiplier on f
c
k to calculate the tension
stress limit
Concrete Box Shear Gamma C for Concrete Partial factor for concrete.
Gamma C for Rebar Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
Gamma C for PT Partial safety factor for prestressing
steel.
Angle Theta The angle between the concrete compression
strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force.
The value must be between 21.8 degrees and 45 degrees.
Factor for PT Duct Diameter Factor that multiplies post-
tensioning duct diameter when evaluating the nominal web
thickness in accordance with section 6.2.3(6) of the code.
Typical values 0.5 to 1.2.
Factor for PT Transmission Length Factor for the trans-
mission length of the post tensioning used in shear resis-
tance equation 6.4 of the code. Typical value 1.0 for post
tensioning.
Inner Arm Method The method used to calculate the inner
lever arm z of the section (integer).
Inner Arm Limit Factor that multiplies the depth of the sec-
tion to get the lower limit of the inner lever arm z of the sec-
tion.
Effective Depth Limit Factor that multiplies the depth of the
section to get the lower limit of the effective depth to the ten-
sile reinforcement d of the section.
Type of Section Type of section for shear design.
Determining Factor Nu1 Method that will be used to calcu-
late the 1 factor.
Factor Nu1 1 factor
Determining Factor AlphaCW Method that will be used to
calculate the
cw
factor.
Factor AlphaCW
cw
factor
Factor Fywk Multiplier of vertical shear rebar characteristic
yield strength to obtain a stress limit in shear rebar used in
6.10.aN. Typical value 0.8 to 1.0.
Shear Rebar Material A previously defined material label
that will be used to determine the required area of transverse
rebar in the girder.
Longitudinal Rebar Material A previously defined material
that will be used to determine the required area of longitu-
dinal rebar in the girder.
Concrete Box
Flexure
Gamma c for Concrete Partial safety factor for concrete.
Gamma c for Rebar Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
Gamma c for PT Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.
PT pre-strain Factor to estimate pre-strain in the post-
tensioning. Multiplies f
p
k to obtain the stress in the tendons
after losses. Typical value between 0.4 and 0.9.

Table 4-2 Design Request Parameters for Multi-Cell Concrete Box
AASHTO LRFD 2007
Multi-Cell Concrete
Box Stress
Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress, PhiC, - Resistance Factor
that multiplies both compression and tension stress limits
Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit -
Multiplier on
c
Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit Units -
Multiplier on sqrt ( )
c
f to calculate the tension stress limit,
given in the units specified
units for
c
Multi-Cell Concrete
Box Shear
Multi-Cell Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, - Resistance Factor
Multi-Cell Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, Lightweight Resis-
tance Factor that multiplies nominal shear resistance to ob-
tain factored resistance for light-weight concrete
Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default
Value = -0.4x10
-3
, Typical value(s): 0 to -0.4x10
-3

Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement - in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default
Value = 6.0x10
-3
, Typical value(s): 6.0x10
-3

PhiC for Nu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value = 1.0, Typical value(s): 0.75 to 1.0
Phif for Mu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Specifies which method for shear design will be used ei-
ther Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in accor-
dance with 5.8.3.4.2 or Vci Vcw method in accordance with
5.8.3.4.3. Currently only the MCFT option is available.
A previously defined rebar material label that will be used to
determine the required area of transverse rebar in the girder.
A previously defined rebar material that will be used to de-
termine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the girder
Multi-Cell Concrete
Box Flexure
Multi-Cell Concrete Box Flexure, PhiC, - Resistance Factor
CAN/CSA-S6-06
Multi-Cell Concrete
Box Stress
Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit -
Multiplier on
c

units for
c
Multi-Cell Concrete
Box Shear
Highway Class The highway class shall be determined in
accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the av-
erage daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for
which the structure is designed

Clause 8.4.6)

8.4.6)

CSA Clause 8.4.6)

Cracking Strength Factor -- Multiplies sqrt(
c
f ) to obtain
cracking strength


EpsilonX Positive Limit -- Longitudinal positive strain limit

that will be used to determine the required area of trans-
verse rebar in the girder

Longitudinal Rebar Material A previously defined rebar
material that will be used to determine the required area of
longitudinal rebar in the girder
Multi-Cell Concrete
Box Flexure
accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the av-
erage daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for

Clause 8.4.6)

8.4.6)

CSA Clause 8.4.6)
Eurocode EN 1992
Multi-Cell Concrete
Box Stress
Compression limit Multiplier on f
c

c
k to calculate the tension
stress limit
Multi-Cell Concrete
Box Shear
Gamma C for Concrete Partial factor for concrete.

steel.
Gamma C for PT Partial safety factor for prestressing
steel.
strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force.
The value must be between 21.8 degrees and 45 degrees.
Factor for PT Duct Diameter Factor that multiplies post-
tensioning duct diameter when evaluating the nominal web
thickness in accordance with section 6.2.3(6) of the code.
Typical values 0.5 to 1.2.
Factor for PT Transmission Length Factor for the trans-
mission length of the post tensioning used in shear resis-
tance equation 6.4 of the code. Typical value 1.0 for post
tensioning.
tion.
late the 1 factor.
Factor Nu1 1 factor
calculate the
cw
factor.
Factor AlphaCW
cw
factor
that will be used to determine the required area of longitu-
dinal rebar in the girder.
Multi-Cell Concrete
Box Flexure

steel.


p
k to obtain the stress in the tendons
after losses. Typical value between 0.4 and 0.9.

Table 4-3 Design Request Parameters for Precast I or U Beams
AASHTO
Precast Comp
Stress
Precast Comp Stress, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multip-
Precast Comp Stress Factor Compression Limit - Multiplier
on fc to calculate the compression stress limit
Precast Comp Stress Factor Tension Limit Units - Multiplier
on sqrt(fc) to calculate the tension stress limit, given in the
units specified
Precast Comp Stress Factor Tension Limit - The tension limit
factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi units for fc
Precast Comp
Shear
PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multiplies both compression
and tension stress limits
PhiC, Lightweight Resistance Factor that multiplies nominal
shear resistance to obtain factored resistance for light-weight
concrete
Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default
Value = -0.4x10
-3
, Typical value(s): 0 to -0.4x10
-3

Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement - in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Val-
ue = 6.0x10
-3
, Typical value(s): 6.0x10
-3

PhiC for Nu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Phif for Mu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Specifies what method for shear design will be used - either
Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in accordance
with 5.8.3.4.2 or Vci Vcw method in accordance with 5.8.3.4.3
Currently only the MCFT option is available.
A previously defined rebar material label that will be used to
determine the required area of transverse rebar in the girder
A previously defined rebar material that will be used to deter-
mine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the girder
Precast Comp
Flexure
Precast Comp Flexure, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multip-
CAN/CSA-S6-06
Precast Comp
Stress
Precast Comp Stress Factor Compression Limit - Multiplier
on fc to calculate the compression stress limit
Precast Comp Stress Factor Tension Limit - The tension limit
factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi units for fc
Precast Comp
Shear
accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the aver-
age daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for

Clause 8.4.6)

8.4.6)

CSA Clause 8.4.6)

Cracking Strength Factor -- Multiplies sqrt(
c
f ) to obtain
cracking strength


EpsilonX Positive Limit -- Longitudinal positive strain limit (see
Clause 8.9.3.8)

label that will be used to determine the required area of trans-
verse rebar in the girder.

Longitudinal Rebar Material A previously defined rebar ma-
terial that will be used to determine the required area of longi-
tudinal rebar n the girder
Precast Comp
Flexure
accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the aver-
age daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for

Clause 8.4.6)

8.4.6)

CSA Clause 8.4.6)
Eurocode EN 1992
Precast Comp
Stress
Compression limit Multiplier on f
c

c
k to calculate the tension stress
limit
Precast Comp
Shear
Gamma C for Concrete Partial factor for concrete.
steel.
Gamma C for PT Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.
strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force. The
value must be between 21.8 degrees and 45 degrees.
Factor for PT Transmission Length Factor for the transmis-
sion length of the post tensioning used in shear resistance
equation 6.4 of the code. Typical value 1.0 for post tension-
ing.
tion.
late the 1 factor.
Factor Nu1 1 factor
calculate the
cw
factor.
Factor AlphaCW
cw
factor
that will be used to determine the required area of longitudinal
Precast Comp
Flexure

steel.


p
k to obtain the stress in the tendons af-
ter losses. Typical value between 0.4 and 0.9.

Table 4-4 Design Request Parameters for Steel I-Beam
AASHTO LRFD 2007
Steel I-Beam -
Strength
Resistance factor Phi for flexure

Resistance factor Phi for shear

Do webs have longitudinal stiffeners?

Use Stage Analysis load case to determine stresses on com-
posite section?

Multiplies short term modular ratio (Es/Ec) to obtain long-term
modular ratio

Use AASHTO, Appendix A to determine resistance in nega-
tive moment regions?
Steel I Beam Comp -
Service
Use Stage Analysis load case to determine stresses on com-
posite section?

Shored Construction?

Does concrete slab resist tension?

Multiplies short term modular ratio (Es/Ec) to obtain long-term
modular ratio
Steel-I Comp -
Fatigue
There are no user defined design request parameters for
fatigue
Steel I Comp
Construct Stgd


Resistance factor Phi for Concrete in Tension


Concrete modulus of rupture factor in accordance with
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.4.2.6, factor that multiplies sqrt of
f'c to obtain modulus of rupture, default value 0.24 (ksi) or
0.63 (MPa), must be > 0

The modulus of rupture factor may be specified using either
MPa or ksi units
Steel I Comp
Construct Non Stgd

Demand Sets 4 - 17
Table 4-4 Design Request Parameters for Steel I-Beam

Resistance factor Phi for Concrete in Tension


Concrete modulus of rupture factor in accordance with
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.4.2.6, factor that multiplies sqrt of
f'c to obtain modulus of rupture, default value 0.24 (ksi) or
0.63 (MPa), must be > 0

The modulus of rupture factor may be specified using either
MPa or ksi units
4.5 Demand Sets
A demand set name is required for each load combination that is to be consi-
dered in a design request. The load combinations may be selected from a list
of user defined or default load combinations that are program determined (see
Chapter 2).
4.6 Live Load Distribution Factors
When the superstructure has a deck that includes precast I or U girders with
composite slabs or multi-cell boxes, Live Load Distribution Factors can be
specified. LLD factors are described in Chapter 3.

AASHTO 5 - 1
Chapter 5
Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges
This chapter describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the AASHTO
STD-2002, LRFD 07 code (Section 5.1), the CAN/CSA-S6-06 code (Section
5.2), and the Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 code (Sec-
tion 5.3) for design and stress check of the superstructure of a concrete box
type bridge deck section. For referring to pertinent sections of the correspond-
ing code, a unique prefix is assigned for each code.
Reference to the AASHTO STD-2002 code is identified with the prefix
AASHTO-STD.
AASHTO-LRFD.
Reference to the CAN/CSA S6-06 code is identified with the prefix CSA.
Reference to the Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 code is
identified as EN 1992-1-1.
In CSiBridge, when distributing loads for concrete box design, the section is
always treated as one beam; all load demands (permanent and transient) are
distributed evenly to the webs for stress and flexure and proportionally to the
slope of the web for shear. Torsion effects are always considered and assigned
to the outer webs and the top and bottom slabs.
5 - 2 AASHTO
With respect to shear and torsion check, in accordance with AASHTO Article
5.8.6, CSA Clause 8.9, and EN 1992-1-1 Section 6.3 torsion is considered.
5.1 AASHTO
This section describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the AASHTO
STD-2002, LRFD 07 code for design and stress check of the superstructure of
a concrete box type bridge deck section.
5.1.1 Stress Design AASHTO-STD-2002
5.1.1.1 Capacity Parameters
PhiC Resistance Factor; Default Value =1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The com-
pression and tension limits are multiplied by the
C
factor.
FactorCompLim
c
f multiplier; Default Value =0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to
0.6. The
c
f is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain the compression
limit.
FactorTensLim
c
f multiplier; Default Value =0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); Typ-
ical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The
c
f is multiplied by the Fac-
torTensLim to obtain the tension limit.
5.1.1.2 Demand Parameters
FactorCompLim percentage of the basic unit stress for compression service
design; Default value =1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand compres-
sive stresses are divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the control-
ling stress can be selected and compared against one compression limit.
FactorTensLim percentage of the basic unit stress for tension service design;
Default value =1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand tensile stresses are
divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the controlling stress can be
selected and compared against one tension limit.
Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges
AASHTO 5 - 3
5.1.1.3 Algorithm
The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber and three points at the
bottom fiber: the extreme left, Bridge Layout Line, and extreme right. The
stresses assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and both
bending moments (M2 and M3).
The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). If the demand set
contains live load, the program positions the load to capture extreme stress at
each of the evaluation points.
The stresses are divided by the appropriate demand parameter. Then extremes
are found for each point, and the controlling demand set name is recorded.
The stress limits are evaluated by applying the Capacity Parameters (see Sec-
tion 5.1.2.1).
5.1.2 Stress Design AASHTO-LRFD-2007
PhiC Resistance Factor; Default Value =1.0, Typical value: 1.0
The compression and tension limits are multiplied by the
C
factor
FactorCompLim
c
0.6. The
c
f is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain the compression
limit.
FactorTensLim
c
f multiplier; Default Values =0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa);
Typical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The
c
f is multiplied by the
FactorTensLim to obtain the tension limit.
5.1.2.2 Algorithm
The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber and three points at the
bottom fiber: extreme left, Bridge Layout Line, and extreme right. The stresses
assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and both bending
moments (M2 and M3).
5 - 4 AASHTO
Extremes are found for each point and the controlling demand set name is rec-
orded.
tion 5.1.2.1).
5.1.2.3 Stress Design Example
Cross Section: AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48 as shown in Figure 5-1

Figure 5-1 LRFD 2007 Stress Design, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Concrete unit weight, w
c
= 0.150 kcf
Concrete strength at 28 days,
c
f = 5.0 ksi
Design span = 95.0 ft
Prestressing strands: in. dia., seven wire, low relaxation
Area of one strand = 0.153 in
2

Ultimate strength f
pu
= 270.0 ksi
Yield strength f
py
= 0.9 ksi
f
pu
= 243 ksi
Modulus of elasticity, E
p
= 28500 ksi
AASHTO 5 - 5

Figure 5-2 Reinforcement, LRFD 2007 Stress Design
AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Reinforcing bars:
yield strength, f
y
= 60.0 ksi
Section Properties
A =area of cross-section of beam = 826 in
2

h =overall depth of precast beam = 39 in
I =moment of inertia about centroid of the beam = 170812 in
4

y
b
,y
t
=distance from centroid to the extreme
bottom (top) fiber of the beam = 19.5 in
Demand forces from Dead and PT (COMB1) at station 570:
P =856.51 kip
M3 =897.599 kip-in
Top fiber stress =

3
top top
856.51 897.599
19.5 0.9344ksi
826 170812
P M
y
A I

= = =

Bottom fiber stress =

3
bot bot
856.51 897.599
19.5 1.139ksi
826 170812
P M
y
A I

= + = + =
5 - 6 AASHTO
Stresses reported by CSiBridge:
top fiber stress envelope =0.9345 ksi
bottom fiber stress envelope =1.13945 ksi
5.1.3 Flexure Design AASHTO-LRFD-2007
PhiC Resistance Factor; Default Value =1.0, Typical value: 1.0
The nominal flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain
factored resistance.
5.1.3.2 Variables
A
PS
Area of PT in the tension zone
A
S
Area of reinforcement in the tension zone
A
slab
Area of the slab
b
slab
Effective flange width =horizontal width of the slab, measured from
out to out
b
webeq
Equivalent thickness of all webs in the section
d
P
Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the pre-
stressing tendons
d
S
Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of rebar in
the tension zone
f
ps
Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO-LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1)
f
pu
Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average
of all tendons in the tensile zone)
f
py
Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of all
tendons in the tensile zone)
f
y
Yield strength of rebar
AASHTO 5 - 7
k PT material constant (AASHTO-LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)
M
n
Nominal flexural resistance
M
r
Factored flexural resistance
t
slabeq
Equivalent thickness of the slab
1
Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO-LFRD Section 5.7.2.2.
Resistance factor for flexure
5.1.3.3 Design Process
The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on the approx-
imate stress distribution specified in AASHTO-LFRD Article 5.7.2.2. The nat-
ural relationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied by
an equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 0.85 c
f
over a
zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located pa-
rallel to the neutral axis at the distance a =
1
c from the extreme compression
fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis. The factor
1
is taken as 0.85 for concrete strengths not exceeding 4.0 ksi. For concrete
strengths exceeding 4.0 ksi,
1
is reduced at a rate of 0.05 for each 1.0 ksi of
strength in excess of 4.0 ksi, except that
1
is not to be taken to be less than
0.65.
The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO-LFRD Pa-
ragraph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated for bending about horizontal axis 3
only. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The
capacity is based on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension zone
as defined in the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located
in the compression zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined ten-
dons in a section, stressed or not, have f
pe
(effective stress after loses) larger
than 0.5 f
pu
(specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not be consi-
dered for the flexural capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.
The section properties are calculated for the section before skew, grade, and
superelevation have been applied. This is consistent with the demands being
reported in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the
flange (slab) in compression is equal to the width of the slab.
5 - 8 AASHTO
5.1.3.4 Algorithm
At each section:
All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.
The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the slab area and slab
width, assuming a rectangular shape.
slab
slabeq
slab
A
t
b
=
The equivalent web thickness is evaluated as the summation of all web hori-
zontal thicknesses.
web
webeq web
1
n
b b =

The
1
stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO-LFRD
5.7.2.2 based on section
c
f
If
c
f >28 MPa, then
1
28
max 0.85 0.05; 0.65 ;
7
c
f | |
=
|
\ .

else
1
0.85. =
The tendon and rebar location, area, and material are read. Only bonded ten-
dons are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.
Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on which sign of mo-
ment they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered to res-
ist a positive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression
stress block and is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located
outside of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression stress
block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a
straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a =
1
c from
the extreme compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to
the neutral axis.
AASHTO 5 - 9
For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:
sum of the tendon areas, A
PS

distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of prestress-
ing tendons, d
P

specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, f
pu

constant k (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)
| |
=
|
\ .
2 1.04
py
pu
f
k
f

For each rebar group, the following values are determined:
sum of the tension rebar areas, A
s

distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the ten-
sion rebar, d
s

The distance c between the neutral axis and the compressive face is evaluated
in accordance with (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4).
1 slab
0.85
PS PU s s
pu
c PS
p
A f A f
c
f
f b kA
d
+
=
+

The distance c is compared to the equivalent slab thickness to determine if
the section is a T-section or rectangular section.
If
1 slabeq
, c t > the section is a T-section.
If the section is a T-section, the distance c is recalculated in accordance with
(AASHTO-LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).
( ) slab webeq slabeq
1 webeq
0.85
0.85
PS PU s s c
pu
c PS
pt
A f A f f b b t
c
f
f b kA
y
+
=
+

5 - 10 AASHTO
Average stress in prestressing steel f
ps
is calculated in accordance with
| |
=
|
\ .
1
PS PU
p
c
f f k
d

Nominal flexural resistance M
n
is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO-
LFRD eq. 5.7.3.2.2-1).
If the section is a T-section,
( )
slabeq
1 1 1
slab webeq slabeq
0.85 ;
2 2 2 2
n PS PS p S y s c
t
c c c
M A f d A f d f b b t
| | | | | |
= + +
| | |
\ . \ . \ .

else
1 1
2 2
| | | |
= +
| |
\ . \ .

n PS PS p S y s
c c
M A f d A f d .
Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying M
n
by .
M
r
=M
n

Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets and
the controlling demand set name is recorded.
5.1.3.5 Flexure Design Example
Cross Section: AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48, as shown in Figure 5-3.
c
= 0.150 kcf
Concrete strength at 28 days,
c
f = 5.0 ksi (~34.473 MPa)
2

Ultimate strength f
pu
= 270.0 ksi
Yield strength f
py
= 0.9 ksi
f
pu
= 243 ksi
p
=28500 ksi
Reinforcing bar yield strength, f
y
= 60.0 ksi
AASHTO 5 - 11

Figure 5-3 LRFD 2007 Flexure Design
Cross-Section, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Figure 5-4 Reinforcement, LRFD 2007 Flexure Design
Cross-Section, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48
5 - 12 AASHTO
Section Properties
2

h =overall depth of precast beam = 39 in
I =moment of inertia about centroid of the beam = 170812 in
4

y
b
, y
t
=distance from centroid to the extreme
bottom (top) fiber of the beam = 19.5 in
Demand forces from Dead and PT (COMB1) at station 570:
P =856.51 kip
M3 =897.599 kip-in
The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the slab area and slab
width, assuming a rectangular shape.
slab
slabeq
slab
48 5.5
5.5in
48
A
t
b
= = =
Value reported by CSiBridge =5.5 in
The equivalent web thickness is evaluated as the summation of all web hori-
zontal thicknesses.
web
webeq web
1
5 5 10in
n
b b = = + =

Tendons are split into two groups depending on which sign of moment they
resistnegative or positive. A tendon is considered to resist a positive mo-
ment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression stress block and
is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located outside of the
bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression stress block extends
over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line lo-
cated parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a =
1
c from the extreme
compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral
axis.
determined:
sum of the tendon areas,
( )
2
bottom
0.153 6 23 4.437in
PT
A = + =
AASHTO 5 - 13
2

distance from the center of gravity of the tendons to the extreme com-
pression fiber,
bottom
23 2 6 4
39 36.586in
23 6
PT
y
+
= =
+

Value reported by CSiBridge =19.5 +17.0862 =36.586 in
specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, 270kip
pu
f =
Value reported by CSiBridge =270 kip
constant k (AASHTO-LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

243
2 1.04 2 1.04 0.28
270
py
pu
f
k
f
| |
| |
= = =
| |
\ .
\ .

Value reported by CSiBridge =0.28
The
1
stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO-LFRD
5.7.2.2 based on section .
c
f
If
c
f >28 MPa, then
1
28
max 0.85 0.05;0.65
7
34.473 28
max 0.85 0.05;0.65 0.80376
7
c
f | |
=
|
\ .
| |
= =
|
\ .

Value calculated by CSiBridge =0.8037 (not reported)
The distance c between the neutral axis and the compressive face is evaluated
in accordance with (AASHTO-LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4).

1 slab
270
36.586
0.85
4.437 270
6.91in
0.85 5 0.8037 48 0.28 4.437
PT pu
pu
c PT
pt
A f
c
f
f b kA
y
=
+
= =
+

Value calculated by CSiBridge =6.919 in (not reported)
5 - 14 AASHTO
the section is a T-section or a rectangular section.
If
1 slabeq
6.91 0.80376 5.56in 5.5in c t > = > , the section is a
T-section.
Value reported by CSiBridge, section =T-section
If the section is a T-section, the distance c is recalculated in accordance
with (AASHTO-LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

slab webeq slabeq
1 webeq
270
36.586
0.85 ( )
0.85
4.437 270 0.85 5(48 10)5.5
7.149in
0.85 5 0.8037 10 0.28 4.437
PT pu c
pu
c PT
pt
A f f b b t
c
f
f b kA
y

= =
+

=
+

ps

7.149
1 270 1 0.28 255.23ksi
36.586
ps pu
pt
c
f f k
y
| | | |
= = =
|
|
\ .
\ .

Value reported by CSiBridge =255.228 ksi
n
LFRD 5.7.3.2.2-1).
If the section is a T-section, then

( )
( )
slabeq
1 1
slab webeq slabeq
0.85
2 2 2
7.149 0.80376
4.437 255.228 36.586
2
7.149 0.80376 5.5
0.85 5 48 10 5.5
2 2
38287.42kip-in
n PT ps PT c
t
c c
M A f y f b b t
| | | |
= +
| |
\ . \ .
| |
= +
|
\ .
| |

|
\ .
=

Value calculated by CSiBridge =38287.721 kip-in (not reported)
AASHTO 5 - 15
n
by .
1.0 38287.42 38287.42kip-in
r n
M M = = =
Value reported by CSiBridge =38287.721 kip-in
5.1.4 Shear Design AASHTO-LRFD-2007
PhiC Resistance Factor; Default Value =0.9, Typical value: 0.7 to 0.9. The
nominal shear capacity of normal weight concrete sections is multiplied by the
resistance factor to obtain factored resistance.
PhiC (Lightweight) Resistance Factor for light-weight concrete; Default Val-
ue =0.7, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The nominal shear capacity of light-weight
concrete sections is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored resis-
tance.
Include Resal (haunched girder) Shear Effect Typical value: Yes. Specifies
whether the component of inclined flexural compression or tension, in the di-
rection of the applied shear, in variable depth members shall or shall not be
considered when determining the design factored shear force.
Shear Rebar Material A previously defined rebar material label that will be
used to determine the area of shear rebar required.
Longitudinal Torsional Rebar Material A previously defined rebar material
label that will be used to determine the required area of longitudinal torsional
rebar.
5.1.4.2 Variables
A Gross area of the section
A
O
Area enclosed by the shear flow path, including the area of holes, if any
A
l
Area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement
A
vsweb
Area of shear reinforcement in web per unit length
A
vtweb
Area of transverse torsion reinforcement in web per unit length
5 - 16 AASHTO
b Minimum horizontal gross width of the web (not adjusted for ducts)
b
v
Minimum effective horizontal width of the web adjusted for the pres-
ence of ducts
b
e
Minimum effective normal width of the shear flow path adjusted to ac-
count for the presence of ducts
d
v
Effective vertical height of the section =max(0.8h, distance from the
extreme compression fiber to the center of gravity of the tensile PT)
CG
top
, CG
bot
Distance from the center of gravity of the section to the top and
bottom fiber
h Vertical height of the section
p
h
Perimeter of the polygon defined by the centroids of the longitudinal
chords of the space truss resisting torsion
u u u u
T M V P , ,
3 2 ,
Factored demand forces and moments per section
t Minimum normal gross width of the web (not adjusted for ducts) =
( )
web
cos b
t
v
Minimum effective normal width of the web = ( )
web
cos
v
b
web
Web angle of inclination from the vertical
Resistance factor for shear
web
Distribution factor for the web
Normal or light-weight concrete factor
The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO-LFRD Para-
graph 5.8.6 (Shear and Torsion for Segmental Box Girder Bridges). The proce-
dure is not applicable to discontinuity regions and applies only to sections
where it is reasonable to assume that plane sections remain plane after loading.
The user should select for design only those sections that comply with the pre-
AASHTO 5 - 17
ceding assumptions by defining appropriate station ranges in the Bridge Design
Request (see Chapter 4).
If the option to consider resal effects is activated, the component of the inclined
flexural compression or tension in the direction of the demand shear in variable
depth members is considered when determining the design section shear force
(AASHTO-LFRD Paragraph 5.8.6.1).
The section design shear force is distributed into individual webs assuming that
the vertical shear that is carried by a web decreases with increased inclination
of the web from vertical. Section torsion moments are assigned to external
webs and slabs.
The rebar area and ratio are calculated using measurements normal to the web.
Thus, vertical shear forces are divided by cos(alpha_web). The rebar area cal-
culated is the actual, normal cross-section of the bars. The rebar ratio is calcu-
lated using the normal width of the web, t
web
=b
web
cos(alpha_web).
The effects of ducts in members are considered in accordance with paragraph
5.8.6.1 of the code. In determining the web or flange effective thickness, b
e
,

one-half of the diameter of the ducts is subtracted. All defined tendons in a sec-
tion, stressed or not, are assumed to be grouted. Each tendon at a section is
checked for presence in the web or flange, and the minimum controlling effec-
tive web and flange thicknesses are evaluated.
The tendon duct is considered as having effect on the web or flange effective
thickness even if only part of the duct is within the element boundaries. In such
cases, the entire one-half of the tendon duct diameter is subtracted from the
element thickness.
If several tendon ducts overlap in one flange or web (when projected on the ho-
rizontal axis for flange, or when projected on vertical axis for the web), the di-
ameters of ducts are added for the sake of evaluation of the effective thickness.
In the web, the effective web thickness is calculated at the top and bottom of
each duct; in the flange, the effective thickness is evaluated at the left and right
sides of the duct.
The Shear and Torsion Design is completed first on a per web basis. Rebar
needed for individual webs is then summed and reported for the entire section.
The D/C ratio is calculated for each web. Then the shear area of all webs is
5 - 18 AASHTO
summed and the entire section D/C is calculated. Therefore, the controlling
section D/C does not necessarily match the controlling web D/C (in
other words, other webs can make up the capacity for a weak web).
5.1.4.4 Algorithm
units to N, mm.
If the option to consider resal effects is activated, the component of the in-
clined flexural compression or tension in the direction of the demand shear in
variable depth members is evaluated as follows:
Inclination angles of the top and bottom slabs are determined
slabtop2 slabtop1
slabtop
2 1
arctan
y y
Stat Stat
| |
=
|
\ .

slabbot2 slabbot1
slabbot
2 1
arctan
y y
Stat Stat
| |
=
|
\ .

where
slabtop2 slabtop1
, y y vertical coordinate of the center of gravity of the top
slab at stations 1 and 2. They origin is assumed to be at the top
of the section and the +direction is up.
1 2
, Stat Stat stations of adjacent sections. When the section being
analyzed is Before, the current section station is Stat
2
; when
the section being analyzed is After, the current section station
is Stat
1
. Therefore, the statement
1 2
Stat Stat < is always valid.
The magnitudes of normal forces in slabs are determined as follows:
3
slabtop slabtop slabtop
3
u u
P M
P A d
A I
| |
=
|
\ .

3
slabbot slabbot slabbot
3
u u
P M
P A d
A I
| |
= +
|
\ .

AASHTO 5 - 19
where
slabtop slabbot
, d d are distances from the center of gravity of the sec-
tion to the center of gravity of the slab (positive).
The magnitudes of vertical components of slab normal forces are determined
as follows:
resal top slabtop slabtop
tan P P =
resal bot slabbot slabbot
tan P P =
On the basis of the location and inclination of each web, the per-web demand
values are evaluated.
Location
Outer Web Inner Web
V
uweb
T
uweb
V
uweb
T
uweb

Shear and
Torsion
Check
2 resal top resal bot
web
abs( )
cos
u
V P P
+ +

Abs(T
u
)
web
abs( )
cos
u
V P P
+ +

0

where
( )
( )
web
web
web
web
1
cos | |
cos | |
n

Evaluate effective thicknesses:
Evaluate d
v
b
v
b
e
t
v

If b
v
0, then
web web flag flag
WebPassFlag 2, 0; 0; 0; 2; 2
vs vt vs vt
D
A A A A
C
= = = = = =
proceed to report web results
If b
e
<0, then SectionPassFlag =2.
Evaluate design :
c
f
c
f min( ,
c
f 8.3 MPa)
Evaluate the stress variable K:
Calculate the extreme fiber stress:
5 - 20 AASHTO
bot bot
3
33
P M
CG
A I
= +
top top
3
33
P M
CG
A I
=
( ) tens top bot
max , =
If
tens
0.5 ,
cc
f > then K =1; else
| |
1 ,
0.166
c
P
A
K
f
= +

where K <2.
Evaluate V
c
per web (shear capacity of concrete):

web
0.1663 .
c c v v
V K f b d = (AASHTO-LFRD 5.8.6.5-3)
Evaluate V
s
per web (shear force that is left to be carried by rebar):
web web
web
.
u c
s
V V
V

=

If
web
0,
s
V < then
web
0;
vs
A =
else
web
web
.
s
vs
y v
V
A
f d
=
Verify the minimum reinforcement requirement:
If
web
0.35
vs y
A t f < (AASHTO-LFRD eq. 5.8.2.5-2), then
web
0.35
vs y
A t f = and
webflag
0;
s
A =
else
webflag
1.
vs
A =
Evaluate the nominal capacities:
web web s vs y v
V A f d =
web web web n c s
V V V = +
Evaluate the shear D/C for the web:
AASHTO 5 - 21

web
web
.
u
s
v v c
V
D
C
b d f
| |
=
|
\ .

Evaluate T
cr
(AASHTO-LFRD eq. 5.8.6.3-2):

0
0.166 2 .
cr c e
T K f A b =
Evaluate torsion rebar:
If
web
1
,
3
u cr
T T < then:
flag
0
vt
A =
web
0
vt
A =
0
l
A =
TorsionEffectsFlag =0;
else:
flag
1
vt
A =
web
web
0
2
u
vt
y
T
A
A f
=

web
0 long
2
u h
l
y
T p
A
A f
=

TorsionEffectsFlag =1.
Evaluate the combined shear and torsion D/C for the web:
web web
0
web
2
.
1.25
u u
v v e
t
c
V T
D b d A b
C
f
+
| |
=
|
\ .

Evaluate the controlling D/C for the web:
5 - 22 AASHTO
If
web web
,
s t
D D
C C
| | | |
>
| |
\ . \ .
then RatioFlag =0;
else
RatioFlag =1
web web
max , .
s t
D D D
C C C
| | | | | |
=
| | |
\ . \ .
\ .

If 1,
D
C
> then WebPassFlag =1;
else
WebPassFlag =0.
Assign web rebar flags where the rebar flag convention is:
Flag =0 rebar governed by minimum code requirement
Flag =1 rebar governed by demand
Flag =2 rebar not calculated since the web b
v
<0
Flag =3 rebar not calculated since the web is not part of the shear flow
path for torsion
Evaluate entire section values:
section web c c
V V =

section web s s
V V =

section web n n
V V =

section web vs vs
A A =

section web vt vt
A A =

section l l
A A =
AASHTO 5 - 23
Evaluate entire section D/C:
web
web
1
web
1
section
.
n
u
v
v v
n
v
s
c
V
t
b d
t
D
C
f
| |
=
|
\ .

This is equivalent to:
web
1
sec
| |
u
n
v v
s tion
c
V
t d
D
C
f
| |
=
|
\ .

and
web
0
1
section
| | | |
2
.
1.25
u u
n
e
v v
t
c
V T
A b
t d
D
C
f
+
| |
=
|
\ .

Evaluate controlling D/C for section:
If
section section
,
s t
D D
C C
| | | |
>
| |
\ . \ .
then RatioFlag =0 else RatioFlag =1
section section
max , .
s t
D D D
C C C
| | | | | |
=
| | |
\ . \ .
\ .

If 1,
D
C
> then SectionPassFlag =1;
else
SectionPassFlag =0.
Assign section design flags where flag convention is:
Flag =0 Section Passed all code checks
Flag =1 Section D/C >1
Flag =2 Section b
e
<0 (section invalid)
5 - 24 AASHTO
5.1.4.5 Shear Design Example
Cross Section: AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48, as shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5 Shear Design Example, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48
= 0.9
c
= 0.150 kcf
= 1.0
Concrete strength at 28 days, f

c
= 5.0 ksi (~34.473 MPa)
2

Ultimate strength f
pu
= 270.0 ksi
Yield strength f
py
= 0.9
f
pu
= 243 ksi
p
=28500 ksi
Reinforcing bars: yield strength, f
y
= 60.0 ksi (~413.68 MPa)
Section Properties
2
(~532902 mm
2
)
h =overall depth of precast beam = 39 in (~990.6 mm)
I =moment of inertia about
centroid of the beam =170812 in
4
(~71097322269 mm
4
)
AASHTO 5 - 25
y
b
,y
t
=distance from centroid to the
extreme bottom (top) fiber of
the beam = 19.5 in (~495.3 mm)
A
slabtop
=A
slabbot
=485.5 = 264 in
2
(~170322 mm
2
)
A
o
=(48 5) (39 5.5) = 1440.5 in
2
(~929353 mm
2
)
P
h
=2 (48 5 +39 5.5) = 153 in (~3886.2 mm)
Demand forces from Dead and PT (COMB1) at station 114 before:
P = 800 kip (~3560 E+03 N)
M3 =7541 kip-in (~852 E+06 Nmm)
V2 = 33 kip (~148.3 E+03 N)
T = 4560 kip-in (515.2 E+06 Nmm)

Figure 5-6 Shear Design Example Reinforcement
AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48
units to N, mm.
values are evaluated.

5 - 26 AASHTO
Location
Outer Web Inner Web
V
uweb
T
uweb
V
uweb
T
uweb

Shear and
Torsion
Check
web
abs( )
cos
abs(148.3E 03 0 0) 1
74151.9
cos0
u
V P P
N
+ +
=
+ + +
=

Abs(T
u
)=515.2E+06 N/A
0
N/A

where
( )
( )
( )
( )
web
web
web 2
web
1 1
cos | | cos |0|
0.5
cos | | cos |0|
n
= = =

Evaluate the effective shear flow path thicknesses:
firstweb lastweb topslab botslab
min( , , , )
min(127,127,139.7,139.7) 127mm
e v v
b t t t t =
= =

Evaluate the effective web width and normal thickness:
Since the web is vertical, b
v
=t
v
=127 mm.
Evaluate the effective depth:
Since M3 <0 then
bot top
max(0.8 , )
max(0.8 990.6,495.3 419.1) 914.4mm
v PT
d h y y = +
= + =

Evaluate design :
c
f
( ) ( ) = = = min ,8.3MPa min 34.473,8.3MPa 5.871
c c
f f
Evaluate stress variable K:
Calculate the extreme fiber stress
bot bot
3 3560E 03 852 E 06
495.3 12.616MPa.
33 532902 71097322269
P M
CG
A I
+ +
= + = + =
top top
3 3560E 03 852 E 06
495.3 0.745MPa
33 532902 71097322269
P M
CG
A I
+ +
= = =
AASHTO 5 - 27
tens top bot
max( , ) max( 12.61, 0.745) 0.745MPa = = =
If
tens
0.5 ,
c
f > then K =1 false;
else
+
= + = + =

| 3560E 03| | |
532902
1 1 2.8
0.166 5.871
0.166
c
P
A
K
f

where K < 2; therefore K =2.
Evaluate V
c
per web (shear capacity of concrete; AASHTO-LRFD 5.8.6.5-3):
web
0.1663 0.1663 2 1.0 5.871 127 914.4
226781N.
c c v v
V K f b d = =
=

Evaluate V
s
per web (shear force that is left to be carried by the rebar):
web web
web
74151.9 0.9 226781
144392N.
0.9
u c
s
V V
V

= = =

If
web
0,
s
V < then
web
0
vs
A = true;
else
web
web
.
s
vs
y v
V
A
f d
=
Verify minimum reinforcement requirement:
If
web
0.35
vs y
A t f < (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-2), then true
2
web
0.35 127
0.35 0.10745mm /mm
413.68
vs y
A t f

= = = and
webflag
0;
s
A =
else
webflag
1.
vs
A =
Evaluate the nominal capacities:
web web
0.10745 413.68 914.4 40645N
s vs y v
V A f d = = =
web web web
226781 40645 267426N
n c s
V V V = + = + =
5 - 28 AASHTO
Evaluate the shear D/C for the web:
web
web
74151.9
0.9
0.1208
127 914.4 5.871
u
s
v v c
V
D
C
b d f
| |
= = =
|
\ .

Evaluate T
cr
(AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.8.6.3-2):
0
0.166 2 0.166 2 5.871 2 929353 127
460147419Nmm
cr c e
T K f A b = =
=

Evaluate the torsion rebar:
If
web
1 1
515.2E6 0.9 460E6
3 3
u cr
T T < => < false, then:
flag
1
vt
A =
2 web
web
0
515.2E6
0.7444mm / mm
2 0.9 929352 2 413.68
u
vt
y
T
A
A f
= = =

2 web
0 long
515.2E6 3886.2
2893mm
2 0.9 929352 2 413.68
u h
l
y
T p
A
A f
= = =

TorsionEffectsFlag =1.
Evaluate the combined shear and torsion D/C for the web:
web web
0
web
74151.9 515.2E6
2
0.9 127 914.4 0.9 2 929352 127
1.25 5.871
1.25
0.427.
u u
v v e
t
c
V T
D b d A b
C
f
+
+
| |

= =
|
\ .
=

Evaluate the controlling D/C for the web:
If
web web
,
s t
D D
C C
| | | |
>
| |
\ . \ .
then RatioFlag =0 false;
else
AASHTO 5 - 29
RatioFlag =1 true
( )
web web
max , max 0.1208, 0.427 0.427.
s t
D D D
C C C
| | | | | |
= = =
| | |
\ . \ .
\ .

If 1,
D
C
> then WebPassFlag =1 true;
else
WebPassFlag =0.
Assign web rebar flags where rebar flag convention is:
Flag =0 rebar governed by minimum code requirement
Flag =1 rebar governed by demand =>true
Flag =2 rebar not calculated since web b
v
<0
Flag =3 rebar not calculated since the web is not part of the shear flow
path for torsion.
Evaluate the entire section values:
section web
2 226781 453562N
c c
V V = = =

section web
2 40645 81290N
s s
V V = = =

section web
2 267426 534852N
n n
V V = = =

2
section web
2 0.10745 0.2149mm /mm
vs vs
A A = = =

2
section web
2 0.7444887 1.48898mm /mm
vt vt
A A = = =

2
section
2893mm
l l
A A = =
Evaluate entire section D/C:
web
web
1
web
1
section
.
n
u
v
v v
n
v
s
c
V
t
b d
t
D
C
f
| |
=
|
\ .
This is equivalent to:

5 - 30 AASHTO
web 2
1 1
section
| | 148.3E3
0.9 127 914.4
0.1208
5.871
u
n
v v
s
c
V
t d
D
C
f

| |
= = =
|
\ .

and
web
0
1
section
2
1
| | | |
2
1.25
148.3E3 515.2E6
0.9 2 929352 127
0.9 127 914.4
0.427.
1.25 5.871
u u
n
e
v v
t
c
V T
A b
t d
D
C
f
+
| |
=
|
\ .
+

= =

Evaluate the controlling D/C for the section:
If
section section
,
s t
D D
C C
| | | |
>
| |
\ . \ .
then RatioFlag =0 false;
else RatioFlag =1 true
( )
section section
max , max 0.1208,0.427 0.427.
s t
D D D
C C C
| | | | | |
= = =
| | |
\ . \ .
\ .

If 1,
D
C
> then SectionPassFlag =1 true;
else
SectionPassFlag =0.
Assign the section design flags where the flag convention is:
Flag =0 Section Passed all code checks true
Flag =1 Section D/C >1
Flag =2 Section b
e
<0 (section invalid)
AASHTO 5 - 31
5.1.5 Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD 2007
PhiC Resistance Factor; Default Value =1.0, Typical value: 1.0.
The compression and tension limits are multiplied by the
C
factor.
FactorCompLim
c
0.6. The
c
f is multiplied by theFactorCompLim to obtain the compression
limit.
FactorTensLim
c
f multiplier; Default Values =0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa);
Typical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The
c
f is multiplied by the
FactorTensLim to obtain tension limit.
5.1.5.2 Demand Parameters
FactorCompLim Percentage of the basic unit stress for compression service
design; Default value =1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand compres-
sive stresses are divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the control-
ling stress can be selected and compared against one compression limit.
FactorTensLim Percentage of the basic unit stress for tension service design;
Default value =1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand tensile stresses are
divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the controlling stress can be
selected and compared against one tension limit.
5.1.5.3 Algorithm
The principal stresses are evaluated at three points at each web: the web cen-
terline at the bottom of the top slab; web centerline at the top of the bottom
slab; and web centerline at the section neutral axis.
The principal stresses are evaluated for each demand set using the Mohr circle
to combine bending, shear, and torsion stresses. The bending stresses assume
linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and both bending moments
(M2 and M3). The shear flow is calculated internally by the program taking in-
to account section properties at the elevation of the stress point. A shear scale
factor is used to convert the total shear flow acting at an elevation (y-
coordinate) to tangential shear stress in the web. The scale factor is equal to the
5 - 32 CAN/CSA-S6-06
web shear-distribution factor divided by the cosine of the angle of inclination
of the web from vertical and divided again by the design width of the web.
web
web web
ShearScaleFactor
cos b

where
web
web
web
web
1
cos(| |)
,
cos(| |)
n
and
web
b is the horizontal width of the web.
A torsion scale factor is used to convert the total torque acting on the section
to tangential shear stress in the web. For interior webs, this is equal to zero.
For exterior webs, this is equal to one divided by the plastic torsional mod-
ulus.
1
TorsionScaleFactor
t
W
=
where
min 0
2 t A W
t
=
0
A =area enclosed by the shear flow path, including area of holes, if any
t
min
=minimum normal width of the shear flow path.
If the demand set contains live load, the program positions the load to cap-
ture extreme stress at each of the evaluation points.
The stresses are divided by the appropriate demand parameter. Then the ex-
tremes are found for each point and the controlling demand set name is rec-
orded.
tion 5.1.5.1).
5.2 CAN/CSA-S6-06
This section describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the
CAN/CSA-S6-06 code for design and stress check of the superstructure of a
concrete box type bridge deck section.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 5 - 33
5.2.1 Stress Design
The following design parameters are defined by the user in the Design Request
(see Chapter 4):

FactorCompLim
c
f multiplier; Default Value =0.6. The
c
f is multiplied by
the FactorCompLim to obtain the compression limit.
FactorTensLim
c
f ' multiplier; Default Value =0.4(MPa). The
c
f ' is
multiplied by the FactorTensLim to obtain the tension limit.
The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber of the top slab and
three points at the bottom fiber of the bottom slab: the left corner, the center-
line web, and the right corner of the relevant slab tributary area. The locations
are labeled in the output plots and tables.
Concrete strength
c
f is read at every point, and compression and tension limits
are evaluated using the FactorCompLim -
c
f multiplier and FactorTensLim -
c
f ' multiplier.
orded.
The stress limits are evaluated by applying the preceding parameters.
5.2.2 Flexure Design
(see Chapter 4):
PhiC Resistance Factor for concrete; Default Value =0.75.
PhP Resistance Factor for prestressing strands; Default Value =0.95.
PhiS Resistance Factor for reinforcing bars; Default Value =0.90.
5 - 34 CAN/CSA-S6-06
5.2.2.1 Variables
A
PS
A
S
Area of reinforcement in tension zone
A
slab
Effective area of the slab
a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with CSA 8.8.3
b
slab
Effective slab width
b
v
Thickness of the web
d
P
Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the
prestressing tendons in the tension zone
d
S
rebar in the tension zone
f
pu
Specified tensile strength of the prestressing steel (area weighted av-
erage of all tendons in the tensile zone)
f
ps
Average stress in prestressing steel (CSA Clause 8.8.4.2)
f
py
Yield tensile strength of the prestressing steel (area weighted average
if all tendons in tensile zone)
f
y
Yield strength of the rebar
k PT material constant (CSA Clause 8.8.4.2)
M
r
t
slabeq
Thickness of the top slab
1
Ratio of averaged stress in a rectangular compression block to the
specified concrete strength as specified in CSA Clause 8.8.3.
1
Factor as specified in CSA Clause 8.8.3.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 5 - 35
The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on approximate
stress distribution specified in CSA Article 8.8.3. The natural relationship be-
tween concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied by an equivalent rectan-
gular concrete compressive stress block of
1
s
f
c
over a zone bounded by the
edges of the cross-section and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis
at the distance a =
1
c from the extreme compression fiber. The distance c is
measured perpendicular to the neutral axis. The factor
1
is taken as
0.97 0.0025f
c
except that
1
is not to be taken to be less than 0.67.
The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with CSA Clause 8.8.3.
The resistance is evaluated for bending about the horizontal axis 3 only. Sepa-
rate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The capacity is
based on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension zone as defined
in the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located in the
compression zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined tendons in a
section, stressed or not, have f
pe
(effective stress after loses) larger than 0.5 f
pu
(specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not be considered for the
flexural capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.
reported in the section local axis. The effective width of the flange (slab) in
compression is evaluated in accordance with CSA Clause 5.8.2.1.
5.2.2.3 Algorithms
At each section:
units to N, mm.
The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the tributary slab area
and the slab width assuming a rectangular shape.
slab
slabeq
slab
A
t
b
=
5 - 36 CAN/CSA-S6-06
The
1
and
1
stress block factors are evaluated in accordance with CSA
8.8.3 based on section .
c
f
1
=0.85 0.0015
c
f 0.67
1
=0.97 0.0025
c
f 0.67
stress block and is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located
outside of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression stress
block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a
straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a =
1
c from
the extreme compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to
the neutral axis.
determined:
PS

distance from the center of gravity of tendons d
P
to extreme compression
fiber
specified tensile strength of prestressing steel f
pu

constant k
2 1.04
py
pu
f
k
f
| |
=
|
\ .

For each rebar group the following values are determined:
sum of tension rebar areas A
S

CAN/CSA-S6-06 5 - 37
Moment resistance First it is assumed that the equivalent compression
stress block is within the top slab. Distance c between the neutral axis and the
compressive face is calculated in accordance with CSA Clause C8.8.4.1.
+
=
+
1 1 slab
P PS PU s s s
pu
c c PS
p
A f A f
c
f
f b kA
d

If
1 slabeq
If the section is a T-section, the distance c is recalculated in accordance
with CSA Clause C8.8.4.1.

( )
+
=
+
1 slab webeq slabeq
1 1 webeq
P PS PU s s c c
pu
c c PS
p
A f A f f b b t
c
f
f b kA
d

ps
is calculated in accordance with CSA
Clause 8.8.4.2.

| |
=
|
\ .
1
PS PU
p
c
f f k
d

Factored flexural resistance M
r
is calculated in accordance with CSA Clause
C8.8.4.1.
( )
slabeq
1 1 1
1 slab webeq slabeq
;
2 2 2 2
r p PS PS p s S y s c c
t
c c c
| | | | | |
= + +
| | |
\ . \ . \ .

else
1 1
.
2 2
r p PS PS p s S y s
c c
M A f d A f d
| | | |
= +
| |
\ . \ .

5 - 38 CAN/CSA-S6-06
The process for evaluating negative moment resistance is analogous.
5.2.3 Shear Design
(see Chapter 4):
PhP Resistance Factor for prestressing strands; Default Value =0.95
PhiS Resistance Factor for reinforcing bars; Default Value =0.90
FactRupture multiplies sqrt
c
f [MPa] to obtain cracking strength; Default
Value =0.40
EpsXLimNeg limit on minimum longitudinal strain in accordance with CSA
Clause 8.9.3.8, Default Value =0.2x10
-3

EpsXLimPos limit on maximum longitudinal strain in accordance with CSA
-3

CoverTop distance from the outside face of the top slab to the centerline of
the exterior closed transverse torsion reinforcement, Default Value =50 mm
CoverWeb distance from the outside face of the web to the centerline of the
exterior closed transverse torsion reinforcement, Default Value =50 mm
CoverBot distance from the outside face of the bottom slab to the centerline
of the exterior closed transverse torsion reinforcement, Default Value =50 mm
used to determine the required area of transverse rebar in the girder.
Longitudinal Rebar Material A previously defined rebar material label that
will be used to determine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the girder.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 5 - 39
5.2.3.1 Variables
A
o
Taken as 0.85 A
oh
in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9.3.17
A
oh
Area enclosed by the centerline of the exterior closed transverse tor-
sion reinforcement, including the area of voids, if any
A
cp
Area enclosed by the outside perimeter of a concrete cross-section,
including the area of holes, if any
A
CT
Area of concrete on the flexural tension side of the member
A
ps
Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the member
A
t
Area of required closed transverse torsion reinforcement per unit
length in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9.3.17
A
vltens
Area of non-prestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the
member at the section under consideration
A
vlcomp
Area of non-prestressed steel on the flexural compression side of the
A
VS
Area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length
A
VSmin
Minimum area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length in
accordance with CSA Clause 8.9.1.3
b Minimum web width
b
v
Effective web width adjusted for the presence of prestressing ducts
in accordance with CSA Section 8.9.1.6
d
girder
Depth of the girder
d
PTTop
Distance from the bottom fiber to the center of prestressing steel near
the top fiber
d
PTBot
Distance from the top fiber to the center of prestressing steel near the
bottom fiber
d
v
Effective shear depth in accordance with CSA 8.9.1.5
E
c
Youngs modulus of concrete
5 - 40 CAN/CSA-S6-06
E
p
Prestressing steel Youngs modulus
E
s
Reinforcement Youngs modulus
f
pu
Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel
M
f
Factored flexural moment demand per web
M
fsec
Factored flexural moment demand per section cut
N
f
Applied factored axial force per section cut, taken as positive if ten-
sile
p
c
Outside perimeter of a concrete section
p
h
Perimeter of closed transverse torsion reinforcement measured along
its centerline
T
f
Factored torsional moment per section cut
V
2c
Shear in section cut excluding the force in tendons
V
2Tot
Shear in section cut including the force in tendons
V
f
Factored shear demand per web cut excluding the force in tendons
V
fsec
Factored shear demand per section cut excluding the force in tendons
V
p
Component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective pre-
stressing force; if V
p
has the same sign as V
f
, the component is resist-
ing the applied shear
x
Longitudinal strain in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9.3.8
xLimMin,
xLimMax
Max and min value of longitudinal strain as specified by the
user in the Design Parameters
The shear resistance is determined in accordance with CSA paragraph 8.9.3
(sectional design model derived from Modified Compression Field Theory).
The procedure assumes that the concrete shear stresses are distributed uniform-
ly over an area b
v
wide and d
v
deep, that the direction of principal compressive
stresses (defined by angle ) remains constant over d
v
, and that the shear
CAN/CSA-S6-06 5 - 41
strength of the section can be determined by considering the biaxial stress con-
ditions at just one location in the web. For design, the user should select only
those sections that comply with these assumptions by defining appropriate sta-
tion ranges in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).
The effective web width is taken as the minimum web width, measured parallel
to the neutral axis, between the resultants of the tensile and compressive forces
as a result of flexure. In determining the effective web width at a particular lev-
el, one-quarter of the diameter of the grouted ducts at that level is subtracted
from the web width.
All defined tendons in a section, stressed or not, are assumed to be grouted.
Each tendon at a section is checked for its presence in the web, and the mini-
mum controlling effective web thicknesses are evaluated.
The tendon duct is considered as having effect on the web effective thickness
even if only part of the duct is within the web boundaries. In such cases, the en-
tire one-quarter of the tendon duct diameter is subtracted from the element
thickness.
If several tendon ducts overlap in one web (when projected on the vertical
axis), the diameters of the ducts are added for the sake of evaluation of the ef-
fective thickness. The effective web thickness is calculated at the top and bot-
tom of each duct.
The Shear and Torsion Design is completed on a per web basis. The D/C ratio
is calculated and the required area of rebar is reported for each web. The sec-
tion design shear force is distributed into individual webs assuming that the
vertical shear that is carried by a web decreases with increased inclination of
the web from vertical. Section torsion moments are assigned to external webs
and slabs.
Thus, vertical shear forces are divided by cos(alpha_web). The rebar area cal-
culated is the actual, normal cross-section of the bars. The rebar ratio is calcu-
lated using the normal width of the web, t
web
=b
web
cos(alpha_web).
5 - 42 CAN/CSA-S6-06
5.2.3.3 Algorithms
units to N, mm.
For every COMBO specified in the Design Request that contains envelopes,
a new force demand set is generated. The new force demand set is built up
from the maximum tension values of P and the maximum absolute values of
V2 and M3 of the two StepTypes (Max and Min) present in the envelope
COMBO case. The StepType of this new force demand set is named ABS and
the signs of the P, V2 and M3 are preserved. The ABS case follows the indus-
try practice where sections are designed for extreme shear and moments that
are not necessarily corresponding to the same design vehicle position. The
section cut is designed for all three StepTypes in the COMBOMax, Min
and ABSand the controlling StepType is reported.
In cases where the demand moment
sec sec
,
f f p v
M V V d < two new force de-
mand sets are generated as follows:
=
pos sec pos f f p v
M V V d
=
neg sec neg f f p v
M V V d
The acronyms -CodeMinMuPos and -CodeMinMuNeg are added to the
end of the StepType name. The signs of the P and V2 are preserved.
values are evaluated
Location
Outer Web Inner Web
V
f
T
f
V
f
T
f

Shear and
Torsion Check
sec web
web
cos
f
V
T
f

sec web
web
cos
f
V
0

where
( )
( )
web
web
web
web
1
cos | |
cos | |
n

CAN/CSA-S6-06 5 - 43
The component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective prestress-
ing force, positive if resisting the applied shear, is evaluated:
( )
=
2 2Tot web
web
cos
c
p
V V
V
Demand moment per web is calculated as:
=
sec
web
f
f
M
M
n

Effective shear depth d
v
is evaluated in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9.1.5.
If M
f
>0, then d
v
= max(0.72d
girder
, 0.9d
PTbot
)
If M
u
<0, then d
v
= max(0.72d
girder
, 0.9d
PTtop
)
The shear demand/capacity ratio (D/C) is calculated based on the maximum
permissible shear capacity at a section in accordance with CSA Section
8.9.3.3.
=

Shear
0.25
f p
c c v v
V V
D
C f b d

The combined shear and torsion demand/capacity ratio (D/C) is calculated
based on web effective width to avoid crushing in accordance with CSA Sec-
tion 8.9.3.18.
+
=

2
1.7
Shear and Torsion
0.25
f p
t h
v v oh
c c
V V
T p
D b d A
C f

If the effective web thickness of the box section is less than ,
oh h
A p the
second term in this expression is replaced by ,
1.7
f
oh
T
A t
where t is the mini-
mum effective thickness of the web.
The torsion demand/capacity ratio (D/C) is calculated based on slab effective
thickness to avoid crushing in accordance with CSA Section 8.9.3.18.
5 - 44 CAN/CSA-S6-06
=

2
1.7
Torsion
0.25
f h
oh
c c
T p
D A
C f

If the minimum of the top or bottom slab effective thickness is less than
,
oh h
A p the second term in this expression is replaced by ,
1.7
f
oh
T
A t
where t is
the minimum effective thickness of the top or bottom slab.
The maximum value of the D/C for Shear and Torsion at webs and Torsion at
slabs is reported in the result table in a column labeled TorDCRatio.
Evaluate the numerator and denominator of
x
(CSA Clause 8.9.3.19).
( )
| |
= + + +
|
\ .
2
2
numerator
0.9
0.5 0.7
2
f
h f
x f p f ps pu
v o
M
p T
V V N A f
d A

( )
=
numerator
2
x p ps
E A
Adjust the denominator values as follows.
If
xdenominator
=0 and
xnumerator
0, then
x
=
xlimpos
and

if
xnumerator
<0, then
xdenominator
=2(E
p
A
ps
+E
c
A
ct
).
Evaluate (CSA eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)
numerator
denominator
x
x
x

Check if axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression face
of the section.
If
girder
0.4 , then 2 .
f
c x x
N
f
A
> =
Check against the limit on the longitudinal strain specified in the Design Re-
quest.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 5 - 45

( ) ( )
= =
limneg limpos
max , and min ,
x x x x x x

Evaluate the angle of inclination of the diagonal compressive stresses as
determined in CSA Clause 8.9.3.7.
18 29 +7000
x
45
Evaluate the factor indicating the ability of diagonally cracked concrete to
transmit tension and shear, as specified in CSA Clause 8.9.3.7.
=
+
0.4
0.525
1 1500
x

Evaluate the nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the con-
crete in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9.3.4.
2.5 where 3.2MPa
c c cr v v cr
V f b d f = <
Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by rebar and determine
the amount of required transverse reinforcement per unit of length CSA
Clause 8.9.3.5.
V
s
=|V
f
V
p
| V
c

If V
s
<0, then A
vs
=0; else
.
1
tan
s
vs
s y v
V
A
f d
=

Check against minimum transverse shear reinforcement in accordance with
CSA Clause 8.9.1.2 and 8.9.1.3.
If |V
f
| >0.2
c
f
cr
b
v
d
v
+0.5
p
|V
p
|, then
min
0.15
;
cr v
vs
y
f b
A
f
=
else
min
0.
VS
A =
If 0,
S
V < then
min
;
VS VS
A A = else
min
max( , ).
VS VS VS
A A A =
5 - 46 CAN/CSA-S6-06
Recalculate V
s
in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9.3.5.
=
1
tan
s s y vs v
V f A d
Evaluate if torsion needs to be considered in accordance with CSA Clause
8.9.1.1.
(
= +
(

0.5 2
0.80 1
0.80
cp
ce
cr c cr
c c cr
A
f
T f
p f

where
box
f
ce
N
f
A
= (N
f
taken as positive when in compression).
Evaluate the longitudinal rebar on the flexure tension side in accordance with
CSA Clause 8.9.3.11 where V
s
is not taken greater than V
f
.
If T
f
<0.25T
cr
, then

( )
tens
1
0.5 0.5
tan
;
f
f u p s
v
vl
s y
M
N V V V
d
A
f
+ +

else

( )
2
2
tens
0.45
1
0.5 0.5
2 tan
.
f
h f
f u p s
v o
vl
s y
M
p T
N V V V
d A
A
f
| |
+ + +
|

\ .
=

Evaluate the longitudinal rebar on the flexure compression side in accor-
dance with CSA Clause 8.9.3.12 where V
s
is taken to be not greater than V
f
.
If T
f
<0.25T
cr
, then

( )
comp
1
0.5 0.5
tan
;
f
f u p s
v
vl
s y
M
N V V V
d
A
f
+

else

( )
2
2
comp
0.45
1
0.5 0.5
2 tan
.
f
h f
f u p s
o v
vl
s y
M
p T
N V V V
A d
A
f
| |
+ +
|

\ .
=

Assign longitudinal rebar to the top or bottom side of the girder based on the
moment sign.
If M
f
<0, then A
vltop
=A
vltens
and A
vlbot
=A
vlcomp
;
else A
vltop
=A
vlcomp
and A
vlbot
=A
vltens
.

If T
f
>0.25T
cr
, then calculate the required torsion rebar per unit length.
=
2 cot
f
t
o s y
T
A
A f

This chapter describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the Eurocode
2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 code for design of the superstructure
of a concrete box type bridge deck section.
5.3.1 Stress Design
(see Chapter 4):
FactorCompLim f
ck
multiplier; Default Value =0.6. The f
ck
is multiplied by
the FactorCompLim to obtain the concrete compression limit.
FactorTensLim - f
ctk
ctk
is multiplied by
the FactorTensLim to obtain the concrete tension limit.
Concrete compressive and tensile strengths are read at every point, and com-
pression and tension limits are evaluated using the FactorCompLim f
ck
mul-
tiplier and theFactorTensLim f
ctk
multiplier.
orded.
(see Chapter 4):

c
Partial safety factor for concrete; Default Value =1.5.

sreb
Partial safety factor for reinforcing steel; Default Value =1.15.

sPT
Partial safety factor for prestressing steel; Default Value =1.15.

prePT
Factor to estimate pre-strain in PT. Multiplies f
pk
to obtain stress in
tendons after losses. Typical values are between 0.4 and 0.9
The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on assumptions
specified in Section 6.1 of the code:
Plane sections remain plane.
The strain in bonded reinforcement or bonded prestressing tendons, whether
in tension or in compression, is the same as that in the surrounding concrete.
The tensile strength of the concrete is ignored.
The stresses in the concrete in compression are derived from the rectangular
design stress/strain relationship given in EN 1992-1-1 clause 3.1.7 (Figure 5-
7).

Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1
The factor , defining the effective height of the compression zone, and the
factor , defining the effective strength, follow from:
= 0.8 for f
ck
50 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.19)
= 0.8 (f
ck
50)/400 for 50 <f
ck
90 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.20)
and
=1.0 for f
ck
50 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.21)
=1.0 (f
ck
50)/200 for 50<f
ck
90 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.22)
The stresses in the reinforcing or prestressing steel are derived from the de-
sign curves in EN 1992-1-1, Figures 3.2 and 3.3 (Figures 5-8 and 5-9).
The initial strain in prestressing tendons is taken into account when assessing
the stresses in the tendons. CSiBridge determines the initial strain by multip-
lying the prestressing steel tensile strength f
pk
by the user-specified factor
prePT
and dividing it by Youngs modulus.

3
cu
cd
t
A
s
d

x
x

F
s
A
c

Reinforcing Steel for Tension and Compression

Prestressing Steel, Absolute Values are Shown for Tensile Stress and Strain
B
A
B
A Idealized
Design
( ) t y
k
k f f =
yk s
kf
yk
kf
yd s
f E ud
uk

yd yk s
f f =
yk
f
yk
kf
B
A
B
A Idealized
Design
pk s
k
pd p
f E ud
uk

0.1 pd p k s
f f =
0.1 p k
f
pk
k
The limit on the mean compressive strain in accordance with EN 1992-1-1,
clause 6.1 (5) for a section in concentric loadings is not considered in the
CSiBridge algorithm.
5.3.2.2 Algorithms
At each section:
The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the slab area and the slab
width assuming a rectangular shape.
slab
slabeq
slab
A
t
b
=
The tendon and rebar locations, areas, and materials are read. Only bonded
tendons are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.
reported in the section local axis. The entire top and bottom slabs are consi-
dered effective in compression.
The ultimate moment resistance of a section is determined using the strain
compatibility method and an iterative approach. The following steps are used:
1) The position of the neutral axis is assumed, and the strains in individual re-
bar and tendons are calculated. Bars and tendons within the concrete com-
pression zone are ignored.
2) The distance x from the extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis is
compared to the equivalent slab thickness t
slabeq
to determine if the section
is a T-section or rectangular section. If x > t
slabeq
, the section is a T-
section.
3) The steel stresses appropriate to the calculated steel strains are calculated
from the stress-strain idealization.
4) The concrete stresses appropriate to the strains associated with the assumed
neutral axis depth are calculated from the stress-strain idealization.
5) The net tensile and compressive forces at the section are calculated. If these are not
equal (the acceptance criterion is | | { } conc rebar conc
0.001*
PT
abs F F F F + <= ),
the neural axis depth is adjusted accordingly, and the procedure returns to
Step 1.
6) When the net tensile force is equal to the net compressive force, the mo-
ments are taken about the center of gravity of the concrete compressive
block to determine the ultimate moment resistance.
The resistance is evaluated for bending about horizontal axis 3 only. Separate
capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The capacity is based
on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension zone as defined in the
Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located in the compres-
sion zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined tendons in a section,
stressed or not, have effective stress after loses equal to
prePT
* f
pk
. If a certain
tendon should not be considered for the flexural capacity calculation, its area
must be set to zero.
5.3.3 Shear Design
(see Chapter 4):

c

sreb

sPT
angle The angle between concrete compression strut and the beam axis
perpendicular to the shear force.
Factor Duct Dia Factor that multiplies PT duct diameter when evaluating
the effective web thickness b
w
in accordance with EN 1992-1-1, clause 6.2.3
(6).

l
Factor for the transmission length of PT, used in shear resistance equa-
tion (EN 1992-1-1 6.4).
Inner Arm Method The method used to calculate the inner lever arm z of
the section. Options are based on defined PT; based on defined rebar; based
on defined PT and rebar; multiplier of section depth.
Inner Arm Limit The factor that multiplies the depth of the section to get
the lower limit of the inner lever arm z of the section (z Inner Arm Limit *
Section Depth).
Effective depth limit The factor that multiplies the depth of the section to
get the lower limit of the effective depth to the tensile reinforcement d of the
section (d = Effective depth limit * Section Depth).
Type of section The type of section for shear design; options are program
determined; prestressed; non-prestressed. If the program determined option is
used and at least one bonded tendon (regardless if stressed or not) is defined
in the section cut, the section is classified as prestressed.
Determining Factor
1
The method used to calculate the factor
1
; options
are program determined or user defined. If the program determined option is
used, the algorithm assumes the factor
1
= , where is determined as fol-
lows:
( ) 0.6 1 in MPa
250
ck
ck
f
v f
(
=
(

If the design stress of the shear reinforcement is below 80% of the characte-
ristic yield stress f
yk
,
1
is taken as:
1
= 0.6 for f
ck
60 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 6.10.aN)
1
= 0.9 f
ck
/ 200 > 0.5 for f
ck
60 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 6.10.bN)
Factor
1
User defined value of factor
1
.
Determining Factor
cw
The method to calculate the factor
cw
. Options are
program determined or user defined. If the program determined option is
used, the algorithm assumes the factor
cw
as follows:
( )
( )
1.0 for non-prestressed structures
1 for 0 0.25
1.25 for 0.25 0.5
2.5 1 for 0.5 1.0
cp cd cp cd
cd cp cd
cp cd cd cp cd
f f
f f
f f f
+ <
< <
<

Factor
cw
The user defined value for factor
cw
used to take account of
compression in the shear area.
Factor f
ywk
The multiplier of the vertical shear rebar characteristic yield
strength to obtain a stress limit in the shear rebar used in equation (EN 1992-
1-1 6.10aN). The typical value is in the range of 0.8 to 1.0.
Shear Rebar Material A previously defined rebar material definition that
can be used to determine the required area of transverse rebar in the girder.
Longitudinal Rebar Material A previously defined rebar material definition
that will be used to determine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the
girder.
5.3.3.1 Variables
A
k
Area enclosed by the centerlines of the connecting exterior webs and
top and bottom slabs, including inner hollow area
A
rebarbot
, A
rebartop
Area of reinforcing steel on the flexural tension side of the
member
A
PTbot
, A
PTtop
Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the
member
A
st
length in accordance with EN 1992-1-1, clause 6.3 (3)
A
sw
A
swmin
accordance with EN 1992-1-1, clause 9.2.2 (5)
b Minimum web width
b
w
Effective web width adjusted for the presence of prestressing ducts
in accordance with EN 1992-1-1, clause 6.2.3 (6)
d Effective section depth
girder
d Depth of girder
d
PTBot
Distance from the top fiber to the center of prestressing steel near the
bottom fiber
d
PTTop
Distance from the bottom fiber to the center of prestressing steel near
the top fiber
f
cd
Design compression strength of concrete
f
yd
Design yield strength of steel reinforcement
f
yk
Characteristic yield strength of steel reinforcement
M
Ed
Ultimate design moment demand per section cut
N
Ed
Applied factored axial force per section cut, taken as positive if
compression
T
Ed
Ultimate design torsion per section cut
V
Ed
Ultimate design shear force demand per section cut excluding the
force in the tendons
V
p
p
Ed
, the component is re-
sisting the applied shear.
c
V
2
Shear in section cut excluding force in tendons
2Tot
V Shear in section cut including force in tendons
z Inner arm length
The shear resistance is determined in accordance with EN 1992-1-1, clause 6.2.
ly over an area b wide and d deep, that the direction of principal compressive
stresses (defined by angle ) remains constant over d, and that the shear
to the neutral axis. In determining the effective web width at a particular level,
a fraction of the diameter of grouted ducts at that level is subtracted from the
web width. The fraction is defined in the design parameter Factor Duct Dia.
Each tendon at a section is checked for presence in the web, and the minimum
controlling effective web thicknesses are evaluated.
The tendon duct is considered to have an effect on the web effective thickness
tire fraction of the tendon duct diameter is subtracted from the element thick-
ness.
tom of each duct.
The Shear and Torsion Design is completed on a per web basis. The D/C ratio
is calculated and the required area of rebar is reported for each web. The sec-
tion design shear force is distributed into individual webs assuming that the
vertical shear that is carried by a web decreases with increased inclination of
the web from vertical. Section torsion moments are assigned to external webs
and slabs.
Thus, vertical shear forces are divided by cos
web
. The rebar area calculated is
the actual, normal cross-section of the bars.
5.3.3.3 Algorithm
units to N, mm.
COMBO case. The StepType of this new force demand set is named ABS
and the signs of the P, V2, and M3 are preserved. The ABS case follows the
industry practice where sections are designed for extreme shear and moments
that are not necessarily corresponding to the same design vehicle position.
The section cut is designed for all three StepTypes in the COMBOMax,
Min and ABSand the controlling StepType is reported.
values are evaluated as shown in the following table:
Location
Outer Web Inner Web
V
Ed
T
Ed
V
Ed
T
Ed

Shear and
Torsion
Check
2 web
web
cos
c
V

T
Ed

2 web
web
cos
c
V

0

where
( )
( )
web
web
web
web
1
cos | |
cos | |
n


( )
2 2tot web
web
cos
c
p
V V
V

=

Demand moment per web is calculated as

sec
web
f
Ed
M
M
n
=
Inner lever arm z is determined based on the stress-strain compatibility method
described in section 5.3.2.2 of this manual. The calculated inner arm z is com-
pared against the minimum threshold specified in the design parameter Inner
Arm Limit as z Inner Arm Limit * Section Depth.
The effective depth of section d of prestressed sections is determined as fol-
lows:
If M
Ed
>0, d = max(Effective depth limit * d
girder
, d
PTbot
)
If M
Ed
<0, d = max(Effective depth limit * d
girder
, d
PTtop
)
The effective depth of section d of non-prestressed sections is determined as
follows:
If M
Ed
>0, then d = max(Effective depth limit * d
girder
, d
rebarbot
)
If M
Ed
<0, then d = max(Effective depth limit * d
girder
, d
rebartop
)
The reinforcement ratio
1
of prestressed sections is determined as follows:
If M
Ed
>0, then
1
= min(0.02, A
PTbot
/b
w
d)
If M
Ed
<0, then
1
= min(0.02, A
PTtop
/b
w
d)
1
of non-prestressed sections is determined as fol-
lows:
If M
Ed
>0, then
1
= min(0.02, A
rebarbot
/b
w
d)
If M
Ed
<0, then
1
= min(0.02, A
rebartop
/b
w
d)
The shear resistance without shear reinforcement of non-prestressed mem-
bers or prestressed single span members in regions cracked in bending is de-
termined as:
( )
13
, , 1 1
100
Rd c Rd c ck cp w
V C k f k b d
(
= +

with a minimum of
( ) , min 1 Rd c cp w
V V k b d = +
where:
f
ck
is in MPa
1
200
1 2.0with in mm k d
d
= +
In prestressed continuous or uncracked single span members the shear resis-
tance without shear reinforcement is determined as:
( )
2
, 1
w
Rd c ctd cp ctd
I b
V f f
S
= +
where
I is the second moment of area.
b
w
is the width of the cross-section at the centroidal axis, allowing for the
presence of ducts, in accordance with equations (EN 1992-1-1 6.16 and
6.17).
S is the first moment of area above and about the centroidal axis.
cp
is the concrete compressive stress at the centroidal axis caused by axial
loading and/or prestressing.
( )
in MPa, 0in compression
cp Ed c Ed
N A N = >
l
is the factor for transmission length of PT, defined in the Design Parame-
ters.
Ratio of V
Ed
over V
Rd,c
is calculated as

,
,
Ratio
Ed
Ed Rd c
Rd c
V
V V
V
=
The design value of maximum shear force that can be sustained by the sec-
tion cut, limited by crushing of the compression strut, is evaluated as:

( )
,max 1
cot tan
Rd cw w cd
V b z v f = +
Ratio of V
Ed
over V
R,max
is calculated as

,max
,max
Ratio
Ed
Ed R
R
V
V V
V
=
If V
Ed
>V
Rd,c
and the design parameter Factor f
ywk
<0.8, then the area of re-
quired vertical shear reinforcement per unit length is calculated as:

( )
cot
Ed sw
ywk ywk
V A
s Factor f z f
=

If V
Ed
>V
Rd,c
ywk
0.8, then the area of re-
quired vertical shear reinforcement per unit length is calculated as:

cot
Ed sw
ywd
V A
s z f
=

The minimum area of vertical shear reinforcement per unit length is calcu-
lated as:

min
0.08
ck sw
yk
f A
b
s f
=
The area of required longitudinal reinforcement is calculated as:

0.5 cot
Ed
sl
yld
V
A
f
=
The maximum resistance of a member subjected to torsion as limited by the
capacity of the concrete struts is evaluated as:

,max ,
2 sin cos
Rd cw cd k ef i
T v f A t =
where t
ef,i
is checked for effective outer web width, and top and bottom slab
widths.
The combined shear and torsion demand/capacity ratio (D/C) is calculated
based on web effective width to avoid crushing in accordance with equation
6.3.1 of the code:

,max ,max
Shear and Torsion
Ed Ed
Rd R
T V D
C T V
= +
The torsion demand/capacity ratio (D/C) is calculated based on slab thick-
ness to avoid crushing in accordance with Section 8.9.3.18 of the code:

,max
Torsion
Ed
Rd
T D
C T
=
The maximum value of the D/C for Shear and Torsion at webs and Torsion at
slabs is reported in the result table in a column labeled RatioTandV.
The required area of two link legs per unit length of transverse reinforcement
for torsion is calculated as:

2 cot
st Ed
t k yd
A T
s A f
=

The required area longitudinal reinforcement per unit length for torsion is
calculated as:

1
1
2 cot
s Ed
k yd
A T
s A f
=

AASHTO-LRFD 2007 6 - 1

Chapter 6
Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA
This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge for design checks
when the superstructure has a deck that includes cast-in-place multi-cell con-
crete box design and uses the Approximate Method of Analysis, as described in
the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code (Section 6.1) and the Simplified Method of
Analysis as described in Section 5.7.1 of the CSA code (Section 6.2), and the
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 code (Section 6.3).
AASHTO LRFD.
CSA.
Reference to the Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005
code is identified as EN 1992-1-1.

6 - 2 AASHTO-LRFD 2007
6.1 AASHTO-LRFD 2007
This section describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the AASH-
TO-LRFD-07 code for design checks when the superstructure has a deck that
includes cast-in-place multi-cell concrete box design and uses the Approximate
Method of Analysis, as described in AASHTO-LRFD Section 4.6.2.2.
For MulticellConcBox design in CSiBridge, each web and its tributary slabs
are designed separately. Moments and shears due to live load are distributed to
individual webs in accordance with the factors specified in AASHTO-LRFD
Articles 4.6.2.2.2 and 4.6.2.2.3 of the code. To control if the section is designed
as a whole-width structure in accordance with AASHTO-LRFD Article
4.6.2.2.1 of the code, select Yes for the Diaphragms Present option. When
CSiBridge calculates the Live Load Distribution Factors (LLDFs), the section
and span qualification criteria stated in AASHTO 4.6.2.2 are verified and non-
compliant sections are not designed.
With respect to shear and torsion check, in accordance with AASHTO-LRFD
Article 5.8.3.4.2 of the code, torsion is ignored.
6.1.1 Stress Design
The following parameters are considered during stress design:

C
factor.
FactorCompLim
c
0.6. The
c
f is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain compression limit.
FactorTensLim
c
f ' multiplier; Default Value =0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); Typi-
cal values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The
c
f ' is multiplied by the Fac-
torTensLim to obtain tension limit.
line web and the right corner of the relevant slab tributary area. The location is
labeled in the output plots and tables. See Chapter 9, Section 9.1.1.
Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA
Concrete strength
c
c
c
f ' multiplier.
The stresses assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and ei-
ther both bending moments (M2 and M3) or only P and M3, depending on
which method for determining LLDF has been specified in the Design Request
(see Chapters 3 and 4).
The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). Extremes are found
for each point and the controlling demand set name is recorded.
6.1.2 Shear Design
The following parameters are considered during shear design:
PhiC Resistance Factor; Default Value =0.9, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The
tance.
Check Sub Type Typical value: MCFT. Specifies which method for shear de-
sign will be used: either Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in ac-
cordance with AASHTO-LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; or the Vci/Vcw method in
accordance with AASHTO-LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.3. Currently only the MCFT
option is available.
Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accor-
dance with AASHTO-LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value =0.4x10
3
,
Typical value(s): 0 to 0.4x10
3
.
Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accor-
dance with AASHTO-LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value =6.0x10
3
, Typ-
ical value: 6.0x10
3
.
PhiC for N
u
Resistance Factor used in AASHTO-LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value =1.0, Typical values: 0.75 to 1.0.
Phif for M
u
Resistance Factor used in AASHTO-LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value =0.9, Typical values: 0.9 to 1.0.
6.1.2.1 Variables
c
A Area of concrete on the flexural tension side of the member
ps
A Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the member
vl
A Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the mem-
ber at the section under consideration
VS
A Area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length
min VS
A Minimum area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length in
accordance with AASHTO-LRFD Equation 5.8.2.5
a Depth of equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO-
LRFD Section 5.7.3.2.2. Varies for positive and negative moment.
b Minimum web width
b
v
Effective web width adjusted for presence of prestressing ducts in
accordance with AASHTO-LRFD Section 5.8.2.9
girder
d Depth of the girder
ot PTb
d Distance from the top of the top slab to the center of gravity of the
tendons in the bottom of the precast beam
v
d Effective shear depth in accordance with AASHTO-LRFD 5.8.2.9
c
E Youngs modulus of concrete
p
E Prestressing steel Youngs modulus
s
E Reinforcement Youngs modulus
pu
f Specified tensile strength of the prestressing steel
u
M Factored moment at the section
u
N Applied factored axial force, taken as positive if tensile
V
p
p
u
ing the applied shear.
u
V Factored shear demand per girder excluding force in tendons
c
V
2
Shear in the Section Cut excluding the force in tendons
2Tot
V Shear in the Section Cut including the force in tendons
s
Strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement (AASH-
TO-LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)

LimitPos LimitNeg
,
s s
=Max and min value of strain in nonprestressed longitudinal
tension reinforcement as specified in the Design Request
V
P
Resistance factor for axial load
F
Resistance factor for moment
The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO-LRFD para-
graph 5.8.3.4.2 (derived from Modified Compression Field Theory). The pro-
cedure assumes that the concrete shear stresses are distributed uniformly over
an area b
v
wide and d
v
deep, that the direction of principal compressive stresses
(defined by angle and shown as D) remains constant over d
v
, and that the
shear strength of the section can be determined by considering the biaxial stress
conditions at just one location in the web. For design, the user should select on-
ly those sections that comply with these assumptions by defining appropriate
station ranges in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).
el, one-quarter the diameter of grouted ducts at that level is subtracted from the
web width.
thickness.
tom of each duct.
Shear design is completed on a per-web basis. Please refer to Chapter 3 for a
description of the live load distribution to individual girders.
6.1.2.3 Algorithms
All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model units
to N, mm.
For every COMBO specified in the Design Request that contains envelopes, a
new force demand set is generated. The new force demand set is built up from
the maximum tension values of P and the maximum absolute values of V2 and
M3 of the two StepTypes (Max and Min) present in the envelope COMBO
case. The StepType of this new force demand set is named ABS and the signs
of the P, V2 and M3 are preserved. The ABS case follows the industry practice
where sections are designed for extreme shear and moments that are not neces-
sarily corresponding to the same design vehicle position. The section cut is de-
signed for all three StepTypes in the COMBOMax, Min and ABSand the
controlling StepType is reported.
In cases where the demand moment <
u u p v
M V V d , two new force demand
sets aregenerated where
pos pos u u p v
M V V d = and
neg neg
.
u u p v
M V V d = The acro-
nyms -CodeMinMuPos and -CodeMinMuNeg are added to the end of the
StepType name. The signs of the P and V2 are preserved.
2 2Tot
girders
c
p
V V
V
n
=
The depth of the equivalent stress block a for both positive and negative mo-
ment is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO-LRFD Equation 5.7.3.1.1.
Effective shear depth is evaluated.
If M
u
>0, then
( ) girder bot bot
max 0.72 , 0.9 , 0.5 .
v PT PT
d d d d a =
If M
u
<0, then
girder girder compslab girder compslab
max 0.72 ,0.9 ( 0.5 ),( 0.5 ) 0.5 .
v
d d d d d d a = (

The demand/capacity ratio (D/C) is calculated based on the maximum permiss-
ible shear capacity at a section in accordance with AASHTO-LRFD Section
5.8.3.2-2.
0.25 '
u
p
V
c v
V
V
D
C f b d
=

(AASHTO-LRFD 5.8.3.2-2)
Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).
numerator
0.5 0.7
u
s u u p ps pu
V
M
N V V A f
d
= + +
denominator s p ps s vl
E A E A = +
Adjust denominator values as follows.
If
sdenominator
=0 and
snumerator
>0, then
s
=
sLimitPos
and

numerator
.
s
p ps
s
vl
s
E A
A
E
=
If
snumerator
<0, then
denominator s p ps s vl c c
E A E A E A = + +
Evaluate (eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).
numerator
denominator
s
s
s

Check if axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression face of
the section.
If >
girder
052
u
c
N
. f ' ,
A

then 2 .
s s
=
Check against the limit on the strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension
reinforcement specified in the Design Request, and if necessary, recalculate
how much longitudinal rebar is needed to reach the EpsSpos tension limit.
LimitNeg
max( , )
s s s
= and
LimitPos
min( , )
s s s
=
Evaluate the angle of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as deter-
mined in AASHTO-LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.
18 29 3500 45
s
+ (AASHTO-LRFD 5.8.3.4)
transmit tension and shear, as specified in AASHTO-LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.
4.8
1 750
s
=
+
(AASHTO-LRFD 5.8.3.4)
crete (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3).
0.083 '
c c v
V f b d =
Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by rebar.
u
S p c
s
V
V V V =

If 0 <
S
V , then 0;
VS
A = else
=

1
tan
s
VS
y v
V
A .
f d

(AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4)
Check against minimum transverse shear reinforcement.
If 0.5 ,
u s c p
V V V > + then
min
0.083 '
c
VS
y
f b
A
f

= in accor-
dance with (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1); else
min
0.
VS
A =
If 0,
S
V < then
min
;
VS VS
A A =

else
min
max
VS VS VS
A ( A , A ). =
Recalculate V
s
in accordance with (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4).
1
.
tan
S VS y v
V A f d =

(AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1).
req
0.5 min ,
1
0.5
tan
u
U
P S
U S U
SL p ps
v f P y
V
V
V V
M
N
A E A
d f
| | | |
| |

\ . |
= + +
|

\ .
=
req
max( , )
VL VL SL
A A A
moment sign.
If 0,
U
M < then =
CompSlab VL U VL
A A and
BeamBotFlange
0,
VL
A =
else =
CompSlab
0
VL U
A and
BeamBotFlange
.
VL VL
A A =
The following parameter is used in the design of flexure:

PhiC Resistance Factor; Default Value =1.0, Typical value(s): 1.0. The no-
minal flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored
resistance
6.1.3.1 Variables
A
PS
Area of the PT in the tension zone
A
S
slab
A Tributary area of the slab
a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO-
LRFD 5.7.3.2.2
slab
b Effective flange width =horizontal width of the slab tributary area,
measured from out to out
webeq
b Thickness of the beam web
d
P
d
S
ps
f Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-
1)
pu
f Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted aver-
age of all tendons in the tensile zone)
py
f Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of
all tendons are in the tensile zone)
f
y
k PT material constant (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)
n
M Nominal flexural resistance
r
M Factored flexural resistance
slabeq
t Thickness of the composite slab
1
Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO-LRFD Section 5.7.2.2
stress distribution specified in AASHTO-LRFD Article 5.7.2.2. The natural re-
lationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied by an
equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 0.85
c
f over a
1
1
1
1
0.65.
The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO-LRFD pa-
ragraph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated only for bending about horizontal
axis 3. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The
pe
than 0.5 f
pu
superelevation are applied. This is consistent with the demands being reported
in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the flange
(slab) in compression is equal to the width of the slab.
6.1.3.3 Algorithms
At each section:
to N, mm.
The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the tributary slab area and
the slab width assuming a rectangular shape.
slab
slabeq
slab
A
t
b
=
1
stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO-LRFD 5.7.2.2
based on section
c
f .
If
c
f >28 MPa, then
1
28
max 0.85 0.05; 0.65 ;
7
c
f | |
=
|
\ .

else
1
0 85 = . .
Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on the sign of mo-
ment they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered to
resist a positive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber com-
pression stress block and is considered to resist a negative moment when it
is located outside of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The com-
pression stress block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the
cross-section and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the
distance a =
1
measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.
determined:
PS

center of gravity of the tendons, d
P

specified tensile strength of prestressing steel
pu
f
constant k (AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)
2 1.04
py
pu
f
k
f
| |
=
|
\ .

For each rebar group, the following values are determined:
sum of tension rebar areas, A
s

distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the tension
rebar, d
s

Positive moment resistance first it is assumed that the equivalent compres-
sion stress block is within the top slab. Distance c between the neutral axis
and the compressive face is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO-
LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4)

1 slab
0.85
PS PU s s
pu
c PS
p
A f A f
c
f
f b kA
d
+
=
+

If
1 slabeq
(AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

1 webeq
0.85
0.85
PS PU s s c
pu
c PS
pt
A f A f f b b t
c
f
f b kA
y
+
=
+

ps
(AASHTO-LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1).
| |
=
|
\ .
1
PS PU
p
c
f f k
d

n
LRFD eq. 5.7.3.2.2-1).
( )
slabeq
1 1 1
slab webeq slabeq
0.85 ;
2 2 2 2
n PS PS p S y s c
t
c c c
| | | | | |
= + +
| | |
\ . \ . \ .

else
1 1
.
2 2
n PS PS p S y s
c c
M A f d A f d
| | | |
= +
| |
\ . \ .

n
by .
r n
M M =
CAN/CSA-S6-06 6 - 15
6.2 CAN/CSA-S6-06
This section describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the
CAN/CSA-S6-06 code for design and stress checks when the superstructure
has a deck that includes cast-in-place multi-cell concrete box and uses the Sim-
plified Method of Analysis, as described in CSA Section 5.7.1.
individual webs in accordance with the factors specified in CSA Clauses
5.7.1.2.1.2 and 5.7.1.4.1.2. When CSiBridge calculates the Live Load Distribu-
tion Factors (LLDFs), the section and span qualification criteria stated in CSA
5.7.1.1 are verified and non-compliant sections are not designed. In accordance
with the footnote of CSA Table 5.5 multi-cell box girders with diaphragms are
to be treated as voided slabs for the purposes of simplified methods of analysis.
Therefore, the multi-cell concrete box deck is classified as Bridge Type B in
accordance with CSA Clause 5.1.
With respect to shear and torsion check in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9,
torsion is ignored.
6.2.1 Stress Design
The following design parameters are defined by the user in the Design Re-
quest:
FactorCompLim
c
c
f is multiplied by
the FactorCompLim to obtain compression limit.
FactorTensLim
c
c
f ' is
multiplied by the FactorTensLim to obtain tension limit.
6 - 16 CAN/CSA-S6-06
Concrete strength
c
c
c
f ' multiplier.
The stresses assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and
either both bending moments (M2 and M3) or only P and M3, depending on
6.2.2 Shear Design
The following design parameters are defined by the user in the Design Request:
Highway Class Highway Class in accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2; De-
fault Value =A, Typical value(s): A,B,C,D. The classification is used to de-
termine F and C
f
factors
FactRupture - multiplies sqrt
c
Value =0.40.
3
.
3
.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 6 - 17
Longitudinal Rebar Material - A previously defined rebar material label that
6.2.2.1 Variables
A
CT
A
ps
A
vltens
Area of non-prestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the
A
vlcomp
Area of non-prestressed steel on the flexural compression side of the
A
VS
A
VSmin
b Minimum web width
b
v
accordance with CSA Section 8.9.1.6
d
girder
Depth of girder
d
PTTop
Distance from the bottom fiber to the center of the prestressing steel
near the top fiber
d
PTBot
Distance from top fiber to center of prestressing steel near the bottom
fiber
d
v
Effective shear depth in accordance with CSA 8.9.1.5.
E
c
E
P
Prestressing steel Youngs modulus
E
s
6 - 18 CAN/CSA-S6-06
f
pu
M
f
Factored moment at the section
N
f
Applied factored axial force, taken as positive if tensile
V
f
Factored shear demand per girder excluding force in tendons
V
p
p
f
V
2c
Shear in the section cut excluding force in tendons
V
2Tot
Shear in the section cut including force in tendons
x
Longitudinal strain in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9.3.8
xLimMin,
xLimMax
Max and min value of longitudinal strain as specified by the
user in the Design Parameters (Chapter 4)
The shear resistance is determined in accordance with CSA Paragraph 8.9.3
(sectional design model derived from Modified Compression Field Theory).
ly over an area b
v
wide and d
v
deep, that the direction of principal compressive
stresses (defined by angle ) remains constant over d
v
, and that the shear
el, one-quarter the diameter of grouted ducts at that level is subtracted from the
web width.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 6 - 19
thickness.
tom of each duct.
Shear design is completed on a per-web basis. Please refer to Chapter 3 for a
6.2.2.3 Algorithms
to N, mm.
For every COMBO specified in the Design Request that contains envelopes, a
new force demand set is generated. The new force demand set is built up
and the signs of the P, V2 and M3 are preserved. The ABS case follows the
In cases where the demand moment M
f
<|V
f
V
p
|d
v
, two new force demand
sets are generated as follows:

pos pos
=
f f p v
M V V d

neg neg
. =
f f p v
M V V d
6 - 20 CAN/CSA-S6-06

2 2Tot
girders
c
p
V V
V
n
=
v
If M
f
>0, then d
v
= max(0.72d
girder
, 0.9d
PTbot
).
If M
u
<0, then d
v
= max(0.72d
girder
, 0.9d
PTtop
).
The demand/capacity ratio (D/C) is calculated based on the maximum permiss-
ible shear capacity at a section in accordance with CSA Section 8.9.3.3 of the
code.

0.25

=

f p
c c v v
V V
D
C f b d

x

numerator
0.5 0.7 = + +
f
x f p f ps pu
v
M
V V N A f
d

xdenominator
=2(E
p
A
ps
)
If
xdenominator
=0 and
xnumerator
0, then
x
=
xlimpos
and
if
xnumerator
<0, then
xdenominator
=2(E
p
A
ps
+E
c
A
ct
).
Evaluate (CSA eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).

numerator
denominator
x
x
x

Check if the axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression
face of the section.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 6 - 21
If
girder
0.4 , >
f
c
N
f
A
then
x
=2
x
.
quest.

x
=max(
x
,
xLimNeg
) and
x
= min(
x
,
xLimPos
)
Evaluate the angle of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as deter-
mined in CSA Clause 8.9.3.7.
18 29 +7000
x
45

0.4
0.525
1 1500
=
+
x

V
c
=2.5
c
f
cr
b
v
d
v
where f
cr
<3.2 MPa
Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by the rebar and deter-
mine the amount of required transverse reinforcement per unit of length
CSA Clause 8.9.3.5.
=
s f p c
V V V V
If V
s
<0, then A
vs
=0;
else .
1
tan
s
vs
s y v
V
A
f d
=

Check against the minimum transverse shear reinforcement in accordance with
CSA Clause 8.9.1.2 and 8.9.1.3.
If 0.2 0.5 > +
f c cr v v p p
V f b d V , then
6 - 22 CAN/CSA-S6-06

min
0.5
;
cr v
vs
y
f b
A
f
=
else
min
0.
VS
A =
If V
s
<0, then A
VS
A
VSmin
; else A
VS
=max( A
VSmin
, A
VS
).
Recalculate V
s

1
tan
=
s s y vs v
V f A d
s
f
.

( )
tens
0.5 1
0.5
tan

+ +
u p s
f
f
v
vl
s y
V V V
M
N
d
A
f

Evaluate the longitudinal rebar on the flexure compression side in accordance
with CSA Clause 8.9.3.12 where V
s
f
.

( )
comp
1
0.5 0.5
tan
+
f
f u p s
v
vl
s y
M
N V V V
d
A
f

moment sign.
If M
f
<0, then A
vltop
=A
vltens
and A
vlbot
=A
vlcomp
;
else A
vltop
=A
vlcomp
and A
vlbot
=A
vltens
.
Highway Class Highway Class in accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2; De-
fault Value =A, Typical value(s): A, B, C, D. The classification is used to de-
termine F and C
f
factors.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 6 - 23
6.2.3.1 Variables
A
PS
Area of PT in tension zone
A
S
slab
A Effective area of slab
a Depth of equivalent stress block in accordance with CSA 8.8.3
slab
b Effective slab width
b
v
Thickness of web
d
P
Distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the pre-
stressing tendons in the tension zone
d
S
ps
f Average stress in prestressing steel (CSA Clause 8.8.4.2)
pu
f Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted aver-
py
f Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of
all tendons in the tensile zone)
f
y
M
r
slabeq
t Thickness of the top slab
6 - 24 CAN/CSA-S6-06
1
specified concrete strength as specified in CSA Clause 8.8.3.
1
Factor as specified in CSA Clause 8.8.3.
1
s c
f over a zone bounded by the
at the distance a =
1
1
is taken as
0.97 0.0025
c
f except that
1
is to be taken to be not less than 0.67.
The resistance is evaluated only for bending about horizontal axis 3. Separate
on the bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension zone as defined in
the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located in the com-
pression zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined tendons in a
section, stressed or not, have f
pe
pu
(specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not be considered for the
flexural capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.
in the section local axis. The effective width of the flange (slab) in compression
6.2.3.3 Algorithms
At each section:
to N, mm.
The slab effective width is evaluated based on CSA Clause 5.8.2.1.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 6 - 25
The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the tributary slab area and
the slab width assuming a rectangular shape.
slab
slabeq
slab
A
t
b
=
1
and
1
stress block factors are evaluated in accordance with CSA 8.8.3 based
on section
c
f .
1
=0.85 0.0015
c
f 0.67
1
=0.97 0.0025
c
f 0.67
Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on the sign of mo-
ment they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered to
resist a positive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber com-
pression stress block and is considered to resist a negative moment when it
is located outside of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The com-
pression stress block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the
cross-section and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the
distance a =
1
measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.
determined:
sum of tendon areas A
PS

distance from center of gravity of tendons d
P
to extreme compression fiber
pu
f
constant k
2 1.04
py
pu
f
k
f
| |
=
|
\ .

6 - 26 CAN/CSA-S6-06
s

distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of tension rebar d
s

Moment resistance first it is assumed that the equivalent compression
stress block is within the top slab. Distance c between the neutral axis and
the compressive face is calculated in accordance with CSA Clause
C8.8.4.1.
+
=
+
1 1 slab
P PS PU s s s
pu
c c PS
p
A f A f
c
f
f b kA
d

the section is a T-section or Rectangular section.
If
1 slabeq
CSA Clause C8.8.4.1.

( ) 1 slab webeq slabeq
1 1 webeq
+
=
+
P PS PU s s c c
pu
c c PS
p
A f A f f b b t
c
f
f b kA
d

ps
Clause 8.8.4.2.
1
| |
=
|
\ .
PS PU
p
c
f f k
d

r
C8.8.4.1.
( )
slabeq
1 1 1
1 slab webeq slabeq
;
2 2 2 2
t
c c c
| | | | | |
= + +
| | |
\ . \ . \ .

else
1 1
.
2 2
r p PS PS p s S y s
c c
M A f d A f d
| | | |
= +
| |
\ . \ .

Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets, and
This section describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the Eurocode
2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 for design of superstructure decks
that includes cast-in-place multi-cell concrete box.
individual webs in accordance with the live load distribution method specified
in the Design Request (Chapter 4). Torsion effects are ignored.
6.3.1 Stress Design
The following design parameters are defined by the user in the design request:

FactorCompLim f
ck
ck
is multiplied by
the FactorCompLim to obtain concrete compression limit.
FactorTensLim - f
ctk
ctk
is multiplied by
the FactorTensLim to obtain concrete tension limit.
pression and tension limits are evaluated using the FactorCompLim - f
ck
mul-
tiplier and FactorTensLim - f
ctk
multiplier.
which method for determining LLDF has been specified in the design request
orded.

c

sreb

sPT

prePT
pk
to obtain stress in
tendons after losses. Typical values between 0.4 and 0.9.
specified in Section 6.1:
design stress/strain relationship given in EN 1992-1-1 clause 3.1. (Figure
6.1). The factor , defining the effective height of the compression zone and
the factor , defining the effective strength, follow from:
= 0.8 for f
ck
50 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.19)
= 0.8 (f
ck
50)/400 for 50 <f
ck
90 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.20)
and
=1.0 for f
ck
50 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.21)
=1.0 (f
ck
-50)/200 for 50<f
ck
90 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.22)

sign curves in EN 1992-1-1, Figures 3.2 and 3.3 (Figures 6.2 and 6.3).

Reinforcing Steel (for Tension and Compression)
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004
A
c
A
s
F
s
d

x
x

3
cu
cd
t
B
A
B
A Idealized
Design
( ) t y
k
k f f =
yk s
kf
yk
kf
yd s
f E ud
uk

yd yk s
f f =
yk
f
yk
kf

Prestressing Steel (Absolute Values are Shown for Tensile Stress and Strain)
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004
the stresses in the tendons. CSiBridge determines the initial strain by
multiplying the prestressing steel tensile strength f
pk
by thr user specified
factor
prePT
and dividing it by Youngs modulus
The limit on mean compressive strain in accordance with EN 1992-1-1,
clause 6.1 (5) for sections in concentric loadings is not considered in the
CSiBridge algorithm.
6.3.2.2 Algorithms
At each section and each web:
The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the slab tributary area
slab
slabeq
slab
A
t
b
=
B
A
B
A Idealized
Design
pk s
k
pd p
f E ud
uk

0.1 pd p k s
f f =
0.1 p k
f
pk
k
superelevation are applied. This is consistent with the demands being re-
ported in the section local axis. The entire top and bottom slab tributary areas
are considered as effective in compression.
The ultimate moment resistance of a section is determined using the strain
compatibility method and an iterative approach. The following steps are used:
1) The position of neutral axis is assumed, and strains in individual rebars and
tendons are calculated. Bars and tendons within the concrete compression
zone are ignored.
slabeq
is a T-section or a rectangular section. If x > t
slabeq
, the section is a
T-section.
equal (the acceptance criterion is | | { } conc rebar conc
0.001*
PT
abs F F F F + <= ),
the neural axis depth is adjusted accordingly, and the procedure returns to
Step 1.
prePT
* f
pk
. If a certain
6.3.3 Shear Design

c

sreb

sPT
angle - The angle between concrete compression strut and the beam axis
perpendicular to the shear force.
Factor Duct Dia - Factor that multiplies PT duct diameter when evaluating
effective web thickness b
w
in accordance with EN 1992-1-1, clause 6.2.3
(6).

l
- Factor for the transmission length of PT, used in shear resistance equa-
tion (EN 1992-1-1 6.4).
Inner Arm Method - Method that will be used to calculate the inner lever
arm z of the section. Options are based on defined PT; based on defined
rebar; based on defined PT and rebar; multiplier of section depth.
Inner Arm Limit - Factor that multiplies the depth of the section to get the
lower limit of the inner lever arm z of the section. (z Inner Arm Limit *
Section Depth).
Effective depth limit - Factor that multiplies the depth of the section to get
the lower limit of the effective depth to the tensile reinforcement d of the
section (d = Effective depth limit * Section Depth).
Type of section Type of section for shear design; options are program de-
termined; prestressed; non-prestressed. If the program determined option is
used and at least one bonded tendon (regardless if it is stressed or not) is
defined in the section cut, the section is classified as prestressed.
Determining Factor
1
- Method that will be used to calculate the factor
1
;
options are program determined or user defined. If the program determined
option is used, the algorithm assumes the factor
1
= ; where is deter-
mined as follows:
( ) 0.6 1 in MPa
250
ck
ck
f
v f
(
=
(

If the design stress of the shear reinforcement is below 80% of the charac-
teristic yield stress f
yk
,
1
is taken as:
1
= 0.6 for f
ck
60 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 6.10.aN)
1
= 0.9 f
ck
/ 200 >0.5 for f
ck
60 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 6.10.bN)
Factor
1
user defined value of factor
1

Determining Factor
cw
cw
. Options are program determined or user defined. If the program de-
termined option is used, the algorithm assumes the factor
cw
as follows:

( )
( )
1 for 0 0.25
1.25 for 0.25 0.5
2.5 1 for 0.5 1.0
cp cd cp cd
cd cp cd
cp cd cd cp cd
f f
f f
f f f
+ <
< <
<

Factor
cw
- User defined value for factor
cw
used to take account of com-
pression in the shear area.
Factor f
ywk
- Multiplier of vertical shear rebar characteristic yield strength
to obtain a stress limit in shear rebar used in equation (EN 1992-1-1
6.10aN). Typical values 0.8 to 1.0.
Shear Rebar Material A previously defined rebar material label that will
be used to determine the required area of the transverse rebar in the girder.
Longitudinal Rebar Material - A previously defined rebar material label
that will be used to determine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the
girder.
6.3.3.1 Variables
A
k
A
rebarbot
, A
rebartop
member
A
PTbot
, A
PTtop
member
A
st
A
sw
A
swmin
b Minimum web width
b
w
girder
d Depth of the girder
d
PTbot
Distance from the top fiber to the center of the prestressing steel near
the bottom fiber.
d
PTtop
Distance from the bottom fiber to the center of the prestressing steel
near the top fiber
f
cd
Design compression strength of the concrete
f
yd
Design yield strength of the steel reinforcement
f
yk
Characteristic yield strength of the steel reinforcement
M
Ed
Ultimate design moment demand
N
Ed
Applied factored axial force, taken as positive in compression
V
Ed
Ultimate design shear force demand per web excluding force in ten-
dons
V
p
p
Ed
, the component is re-
c
V
2
Shear in the section cut excluding force in tendons.
2Tot
V Shear in the section cut including force in tendons.
z Inner arm length.
to the neutral axis. In determining the effective web width at a particular level,
a fraction of the diameter of grouted ducts at that level is subtracted from the
web width. The fraction is defined in the design parameter Factor Duct Dia.
Each tendon at a section is checked for presence in the web and the minimum
tire fraction of the tendon duct diameter is subtracted from the element thick-
ness.
tom of each duct.
The Shear Design is completed on a per web basis. The D/C ratio is calculated
and the required area of rebar is reported for each web. For a description of dis-
tribution of live and other loads into individual webs, please refer to Chapter 3.
Section torsion moments are ignored.
6.3.3.3 Algorithm
units to N, mm.
and the signs of the P, V2 and M3 are preserved. The ABS case follows the

2 2tot
web
c
p
V V
V
n
=
Inner lever arm z is determined based on stress strain compatibility method
described in Section 6.3.2.2 of this manual. The calculated inner arm z is
compared against the minimum threshold specified in the design parameter
Inner Arm Limit as z Inner Arm Limit * Section Depth.
The effective depth of the section d of the prestressed sections is determined
as follows:
If M
Ed
>0, then d =max(Effective depth limit * d
girder
, d
PTbot
)
If M
Ed
<0, then d =max(Effective depth limit * d
girder
, d
PTtop
)
The effective depth of the section d of the non-prestressed sections is deter-
mined as follows:
If M
Ed
girder
, d
rebarbot
)
If M
Ed
girder
, d
rebartop
)
1
If M
Ed
>0, then
1
=min(0.02, A
PTbot
/ b
w
d)
If M
Ed
<0, then
1
=min(0.02, A
PTtop
/ b
w
d)
1
lows :
If M
Ed
>0, then
1
=min(0.02, A
rebarbot
/ b
w
d)
If M
Ed
<0, then
1
=min(0.02, A
rebartop
/ b
w
d)
termined as:
( )
13
, , 1 1
100
Rd c Rd c ck cp w
V C k f k b d
(
= +

with a minimum of

V V k b d = +
where:
f
ck
is in MPa

1
200
1 2.0with in mm k d
d
= +
In prestressed continuous or uncracked single span members the shear resis-
( )
2
, 1
w
Rd c ctd cp ctd
I b
V f f
S
= +
where
I is the second moment of area
b
w
is the width of the cross-section at the centroidal axis, allowing
for the presence of ducts, in accordance with equations (EN
1992-1-1 6.16 and 6.17).
S is the first moment of area above and about the centroidal axis
cp
is the concrete compressive stress at the centroidal axis caused
by axial loading and/or prestressing
( )
cp Ed c Ed
N A N = >
l
is the factor for transmission length of PT, defined in the design
parameters
Ratio of V
Ed
over V
Rd,c
is calculated as:

,
,
Ratio
Ed
Ed Rd c
Rd c
V
V V
V
=
The design value of the maximum shear force that can be sustained by the
web, limited by crushing of the compression strut, is evaluated as:

( )
,max 1
cot tan
Rd cw w cd
V b z v f = +
Ratio of V
Ed
over V
R,max
is calculated as:

,max
,max
Ratio
Ed
Ed R
R
V
V V
V
=
If V
Ed
>V
Rd,c
ywk
<0.8, then the area re-
quired of vertical shear reinforcement per unit length is calculated as:

( )
cot
Ed sw
ywk ywk
V A
s Factor f z f
=

If V
Ed
>V
Rd,c
ywk
0.8, then the area re-
quired of vertical shear reinforcement per unit length is calculated as:

cot
Ed sw
ywd
V A
s z f
=

lated as:

min
0.08
ck sw
yk
f A
b
s f
=

0.5 cot
Ed
sl
yld
V
A
f
=

AASHTO-LRFD-07 7 - 1
Chapter 7
Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges
This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge for design and stress
check when the superstructure has a deck that includes precast I or U girders
with composite slabs in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code (Sec-
tion 7.1), the CAN/CSA-S6-06 code (Section 7.2) and the Eurocode 2 EN
1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 code (Section 7.3).
AASHTO.
CSA.
Reference to the Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 code
is identified as EN 1992-1-1.
7.1 AASHTO-LRFD-07
This section describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the AASH-
TO-LRFD-07 code for design and stress check when the superstructure has a
deck that includes precast I or U girders with composite slabs.
7 - 2 AASHTO-LRFD-07
7.1.1 Stress Design
The following parameters are considered during stress design:

C
factor.
FactorCompLim
c
0.6. The
c
f is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain compression limit.
FactorTensLim f ' c multiplier; Default Value =0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); Typ-
ical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f ' c is multiplied by the
FactorTensLim to obtain tension limit.
The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber of the composite slab:
the left corner, the centerline beam and the right corner of the composite slab
tributary area. The locations of stress output points at the slab bottom fiber and
the beam top and bottom fibers depend on the type of precast beam present in
the section cut. The locations are labeled in the output plots and tables.
Concrete strength
c
f is read at every point and compression and tension limits
are evaluated using the FactorCompLim
c
f multiplier and FactorTensLim
f ' c multiplier.
which method for determining the LLDF has been specified in the Design Re-
quest (see Chapters 3 and 4).
The stress limits are evaluated by applying the preceding Parameters.
7.1.2 Shear Design
The following parameters are considered during shear design:
Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges
PhiC Resistance Factor; Default Value =0.9, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The
tance.
Check Sub Type Typical value: MCFT. Specifies which method for shear de-
sign will be used: Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in accordance
with AASTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.2; or the Vci/Vcw method in accordance
with AASTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.3 Currently only the MCFT option is
available.
Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accor-
dance with AASTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value =0.4x10
-3
, Typi-
cal value(s): 0 to 0.4x10
-3
.
Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accor-
dance with AASTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value =6.0x10
-3
, Typical
value(s): 6.0x10
-3
.
PhiC for N
u
Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1 of the code; Default
Value =1.0, Typical values: 0.75 to 1.0.
Phif for M
u
Resistance Factor used in AASTO LRFD equation 5.8.3.5-1; De-
fault Value =0.9, Typical values: 0.9 to 1.0.
will be used to determine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the girder
7.1.2.1 Variables
a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASTO
LRFD section 5.7.3.2.2. Varies for positive and negative moment.
A
c
A
ps
A
VS
A
VSmin
accordance with (AASTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5)
A
vl
Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the mem-
b Minimum web width of the beam
d
v
Effective shear depth in accordance with AASTO LRFD section
5.8.2.9
d
girder
Depth of the girder
d
compslab
Depth of the composite slab (includes concrete haunch t2)
d
PTBot
Distance from the top of the composite slab to the center of gravity
of the tendons in the bottom of the precast beam
E
c
E
p
Pestressing steel Youngs modulus
E
s
f
pu
M
u
N
u
Applied factored axial force, taken as positive if tensile
V
2c
Shear in Section Cut, excluding the force in the tendons
V
2tot
Shear in Section Cut, including the force in the tendons
V
p
p
u
V
u
Factored shear demand per girder, excluding the force in the tendons
s
Strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement (AASTO
LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)
sLimitPos
,
sLimitNeg
=Max and min value of strain in nonprestressed longitudinal
tension reinforcement as specified in the Design Request
V
P
Resistance factor for axial load
F
Resistance factor for moment
The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASTO LRFD para-
graph 5.8.3.4.2 (derived from Modified Compression Field Theory). The pro-
cedure assumes that the concrete shear stresses are distributed uniformly over
an area b
v
wide and d
v
deep, that the direction of principal compressive stresses
(defined by angle and shown as D) remains constant over d
v
, and that the
conditions at just one location in the web. The user should select for design on-
It is assumed that the precast beams are pre-tensioned, and therefore, no ducts
are present in webs. The effective web width is taken as the minimum web
width, measured parallel to the neutral axis, between the resultants of the ten-
sile and compressive forces as a result of flexure.
Shear design is completed on a per-girder basis. Please refer to Chapter 3 for a
7.1.2.3 Algorithms
units to N, mm.
two new force demand sets are generated. The new force demand sets are
built up from the maximum tension values of P and the maximum and mini-
mum values of V2 and minimum values of M3 of the two StepTypes (Max
and Min) present in the envelope COMBO case. The StepType of these new
force demand sets are named MaxM3MinV2 and MinM3MaxV2, respective-
ly. The signs of all force components are preserved. The two new cases are
added to comply with industry practice where sections are designed for ex-
treme shear and moments that are not necessarily corresponding to the same
design vehicle position. The section cut is designed for all four StepTypes in
the COMBOMax, Min, MaxM3MinV2, and MinM3MaxV2and the con-
trolling StepType is reported.
In cases where the demand moment <
u u p v
M V V d , two new force demand
sets are generated where
pos pos u u p v
M V V d = and
neg neg
.
u u p vn
M V V d = The
acronyms -CodeMinMuPos and -CodeMinMuNeg are added to the end
of the StepType name. The signs of the P and V2 are preserved. The compo-
nent in the direction of the applied shear of the effective prestressing force,
positive if resisting the applied shear, is evaluated:

2 2tot
girders
c
p
V V
V
n
=
Depth of equivalent stress block a for both positive and negative moment is
evaluated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1).
Effective shear depth is evaluated.
If M
u
>0, then
( ) girder bot bot
max 0.72 ,0.9 , 0.5 .
v PT PT
d d d d a =
If M
u
<0, then
( ) ( ) girder girder compslab girder compslab
max 0.72 ,0.9 0.5 , 0.5 0.5 .
v
d d d d d d a ( =

If <
u u p v
M V V d , then
( ) u u p v
M V V d . =
The demand/capacity (D/C) ratio is calculated based on the maximum per-
missible shear capacity at a section in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
5.8.3.2-2.
0.25 '
u
p
V
c v
V
V
D
C f b d
=

(AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.2-2)
Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4):
numerator
0.5 0.7
u
s u u p ps pu
V
M
N V V A f
d
= + +
denominator s p ps s vl
E A E A = +
Adjust denominator values as follows
If
denominator
0
s
= and
numerator
0,
s
> then
LimitPos s s
= and

numerator s
p ps
s
vl
s
E A
A .
E

=

If
numerator
0,
s
< then
denominator
.
s p ps s vl c c
E A E A E A = + +
Evaluate (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4):
numerator
denominator
s
s
s

of the section.
If >
girder
052
u
c
N
. f ' ,
A

then 2 .
s s
=
Check against the limit on the strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension
reinforcement specified in the Design Request, and if necessary, recalculate
how much longitudinal rebar is needed to reach the EpsSpos tension limit.
( ) LimitNeg
max ,
s s s
= and ( )
LimitPos
min ,
s s s
=
Evaluate the angle of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as de-
termined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.
18 29 3500 45
s
+ (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)
transmit tension and shear, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.
4.8
1 750
s
=
+
(AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)
Evaluate nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the concrete
AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3.
0.083 '
c c v
V f b d =
Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by rebar.
u
S p c
s
V
V V V =

If 0
S
V , < then = 0,
VS
A
else .
1
tan
s
VS
y v
V
A
f d
=

(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4)

If 0.5 ,
u s c p
V V V > + then
min
0.083 '
c
VS
y
f b
A
f

= in accor-
dance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1); else
min
0.
VS
A =
If 0
S
V , < then
min VS VS
A A = , else
min
max( , ).
VS VS VS
A A A =
Recalculate V
s
in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4).
1
tan
S VS y v
V A f d =

Evaluate longitudinal rebar on flexure tension side in accordance with
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1).
req
0.5 min ,
1
0.5
tan
u
U
P S
U S U
SL p ps
v f P y
V
V
V V
M
N
A E A
d f
| | | |
| |

\ . |
= + +
|

\ .
req
max( , )
VL VL SL
A A A =
Assign longitudinal rebar to the top or bottom side of the girder based on
moment sign.
If 0
U
M , < then
CompSlabU VL VL
A A =

and
BeamBotFlange
0;
VL
A =
else
CompSlabU
0
VL
A =

and
BeamBotFlange
=
VL VL
A A .
7.1.2.4 Shear Design Example
The girder spacing is 9'-8". The girder type is AASHTO Type VI Girders, 72-
inch-deep, 42-inch-wide top flange and 28-inch-wide bottom flange (AASHTO
28/72 Girders). The concrete deck is 8 inches thick, with the haunch thickness
assumed =0.

Figure 7-1 Shear design example deck section
Mater ials
Concrete strength
Prestressed girders 28-day strength,
c
f = 6 ksi,
Girder final elastic modulus, E
c
=4,415 ksi
Deck slab: 4.0 ksi, Deck slab elastic modulus, E
s
=3,834 ksi
Reinforcing steel Yield strength, f
y
= 60 ksi

Figure 7-2 Shear design example beam section

Prestressing strands 0.5-inch-diameter low relaxation strands Grade 270
Strand area, A
ps
= 0.153 in
2

Steel yield strength, f
py
= 243 ksi
Steel ultimate strength, f
pu
= 270 ksi
Prestressing steel modulus, E
p
= 28,500 ksi
Basic beam section pr oper ties
Depth = 72 in.
Thickness of web = 8 in.
Area, A
g
= 1,085 in
2

A
c
=Area of concrete on the flexural
tension side of the member (bordered
at mid depth of the beam +slab height) = 551 in
2

Moment of inertia, Ig = 733,320 in
4

N.A. to top, y
t
= 35.62 in.
N.A. to bottom, y
b
= 36.38 in.
P/S force eccentricity e = 31.380 in.
In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 2007 4.6.2.6, the effective flange
width of the concrete deck slab is taken as the tributary width. For the inte-
rior beam, the b
slab
=9'-8" =116 in.
Demands at interior girder Section 2 =station 10,
after girder Section 2, V
u
=319.1 kip; M
u
=3678 kip-ft


2 2tot
girders
=
c
p
V V
V
n
V
p
=0 since no inclined tendons are present.
Depth of equivalent stress block a for both positive and negative moment is
evaluated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1).
Effective shear depth is evaluated:
Since M
u
>0, then (for calculation of the depth of the compression block,
refer to the Flexure example in Section 6.1.3 of this manual)
( )
( )
girder bot bot
max 0.72 , 0.9 , 0.5
max 0.72 80", 0.9 75", 75" 0.5 5.314 0.85
v PT PT
d d d d a =
=
( ) max 576" 675" 7274" 7274" = =
v
d . , . , . .
Value reported by CSiBridge =72.74"
Check if
u u p v
M V V d <
( )
= = > = 3,678 12 44,136kip-in 319 0 72.74 23,204kip-in
u
M
D/C is calculated based on the maximum permissible shear capacity at a sec-
tion in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.2-2.
319
0
0.9
0.406
0.25 ' 0.25 6 8 72.74
u
p
V
c v
V
V
D
C f b d
= = =

Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-
4)
numerator
0.5 0.7
3678 12
0.5 0 319 0 6.73 0.7 270 346.2kip
72.74
u
s u u p ps pu
V
M
N V V A f
d
= + +
= + + =

2
denominator
28500ksi 6.73in 191805kip
s p ps s vl
E A E A = + = =
Adjust denominator values as follows
If
denominator
0
s
= and
numerator
0,
s
> then
LimitPos s s
= and
numerator s
p ps
s
vl
s
E A
A
E
= is not applicable.
If
numerator
0,
s
< then
denominator
28500 6.73 4415 551.4 26263461kip
s p ps s vl c c
E A E A E A = + +
= + =

Evaluate (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)
numerator
denominator
346.2
1.318E-4
2626346
s
s
s

= = =

Value reported by CSiBridge =1.318E-4
of the section.
If
girder
0.52 ' ,
u
c
N
f
A
> then 2
s s
= ; this is not applicable since N
u
=0.
Check against the limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension rein-
forcement as specified in the Design Request, and recalculate A
vl
.
( ) ( )
LimitPos
max , max 1.318E-4, 1.318E-4 4 1.318E-4
s s s
= = =
Evaluate angle of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as deter-
mined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.
18 29 3500 45
s
= + 29 3500 1.318E-4 28.5deg = + =
Value reported by CSiBridge =28.5 deg
Evaluate factor indicating ability of diagonally cracked concrete to transmit
tension and shear as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.
4.8 4.8
5.3265
1 750 1 750 1.318E-4
s
= = =
+ +

Evaluate nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the concrete
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3).
0.0316 '
0.0316 5.32 1.0 6 8 72.74 239.92kip
c c v
V f b d =
= =

Value reported by CSiBridge =240.00 kip
Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by rebar:
319
0 239.6 114.8kip
0.9
u
S p c
s
V
V V V
= = =
If 0,
S
V < then 0;
VS
A = else
2
114.8
1.43E-2in /in
1 1
60 72.74
tan tan28.5
s
VS
y v
V
A
f d
= = =

If 0.5 319.1 kip 0.5 239.6 119.8 kip
u s c p
V V V > + > > = is true,
2
min
0.0316 ' 0.0316 1.0 6 8
0.01032in /in
60
c
VS
y
f b
A
f

= = =

If 0
S
V , < then
min
;
VS VS
A A =

else ( ) = =
2
min
max , 1.43E-2in /2
VS VS VS
A A A
Value reported by CSiBridge =1.43E-2in
2
/in
Recalculate V
s
in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4).
1 1
0.0143 60 72.74 114.9kip
tan tan28.5
S VS y v
V A f d = = =

Evaluate longitudinal rebar on flexure tension side in accordance with
AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1:
req
2
0.5 min ,
1
0.5
tan
319
0 0.5 114.9
3678 12
0 1 0.9
0.5 28500 6.73 3176.3 in
72.74 0.9 1.0 tan28.5 60
u
U
P S
U S S U
SL p ps
v f P y
V
V
V V
M
N
A E A
d f
| |
| |
| |

| \ .
= + +
|

\ .
| |

|
|
= + + =
|
\ .

2
no additional longitudinal re-
bar is required in the beam bottom flange.
The following parameter is used in the design of flexure:

PhiC Resistance Factor; Default Value =1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The nomin-
al flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-
sistance
7.1.3.1 Variables
A
PS
A
S
A
slab
Tributary area of the slab
a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD 5.7.3.2.2.
b
slab
Effective flange width =horizontal width of slab tributary area,
measured from out to out
b
webeq
Thickness of the beam web
d
P
d
S
f
ps
Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1)
f
pu
Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted aver-
f
py
Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of
f
y
k PT material constant (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)
M
n
M
r
t
slabeq
Thickness of the composite slab
1
Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.2.2
stress distribution specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.7.2.2. The natural re-
lationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied by an
equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 0.85
c
f over a
1
1
1
1
0.65.
The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD pa-
ragraph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated only for bending about horizontal
axis 3. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The
pe
than 0.5 f
pu
in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the flange
(slab) in compression is equal to the width of the slab.
7.1.3.3 Algorithms
At each section:
units to N, mm.
The
1
stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
5.7.2.2 based on section .
c
f
If
c
f >28 MPa, then
1
28
max 0.85 0.05; 0.65 ;
7
c
f | |
=
|
\ .

else
1
=0.85.
The tendon and rebar location, area and material are read. Only bonded ten-
Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on what sign of mo-
stress block, and it is considered to resist a negative moment when it is lo-
cated outside of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression
stress block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section
and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a =
1
c
from the extreme compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicu-
lar to the neutral axis.
determined:
PS

center of gravity of the tendons, d
P

pu
f
constant k (eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)
2 1.04
py
pu
f
k
f
| |
=
|
\ .

sum of tension rebar areas, A
s

distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the ten-
sion rebar, d
s

Positive moment resistance First it is assumed that the equivalent compres-
and the compressive face is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD
eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4)
1 slab
0.85
+
=
+
PS PU s s
pu
c PS
p
A f A f
c
f
f b kA
d

The distance c is compared to the slab thickness. If the distance to the neutral
axis c is larger than the composite slab thickness, the distance c is re-
evaluated. For this calculation, the beam flange width and area are converted
to their equivalents in slab concrete by multiplying the beam flange width by
the modular ratio between the precast girder concrete and the slab concrete.
The web width in the equation for c is substituted for the effective converted
girder flange width. The distance c is recalculated in accordance with
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).
1 webeq
0.85
0.85
+
=
+
PS PU s s c
pu
c PS
pt
A f A f f b b t
c
f
f b kA
y

If the calculated value of c exceeds the sum of the deck thickness and the
equivalent precast girder flange thickness, the program assumes the neutral
axis is below the flange of the precast girder and recalculates c. The term
( ) 0.85
c w
f b b in the calculation is broken into two terms, one refers to the
contribution of the deck to the composite section flange and the second refers
to the contribution of the precast girder flange to the composite girder flange.
ps
AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1.
| |
=
|
\ .
1
PS PU
p
c
f f k
d

n
is calculated in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1.
( )
slabeq
1 1 1
slab webeq slabeq
0.85 ;
2 2 2 2
n PS PS p S y s c
t
c c c
| | | | | |
= + +
| | |
\ . \ . \ .

else
1 1
2 2
n PS PS p S y s
c c
M A f d A f d
| | | |
= +
| |
\ . \ .

n
by .
r n
M M =
The process for evaluating negative moment resistance is analogous, except
that calculation of positive moment resistance is not applicable.
7.1.3.4 Flexure Capacity Design Example

Figure 7-3 Flexure capacity design example deck section
Girder spacing: 9'-8"
Girder type: AASHTO Type VI Girders, 72 inches deep, 42-inch-wide top
flange, and 28-inch-wide bottom flange (AASHTO 28/72 Girders)
Concrete deck: 8 inches thick, haunch thickness assumed =0

Figure 7-4 Flexure capacity design example beam section
Mater ials
Concrete strength
Prestressed girders 28-day strength,
c
f = 6 ksi,
Girder final elastic modulus, Ec = 4,696 ksi
Deck slab = 4.0 ksi,
Deck slab elastic modulus, Es = 3,834 ksi
Reinforcing steel yield strength, fy = 60 ksi
Prestressing strands 0.5-inch-diameter low relaxation strands Grade 270
Strand area, Aps = 0.153 in
2

Steel yield strength, fpy = 243 ksi
Steel ultimate strength, fpu = 270 ksi
Prestressing steel modulus, Ep = 28,500 ksi
Basic beam section pr oper ties
Depth = 72 in.
Thickness of web = 8 in.
Area, Ag = 1,085 in
2

Moment of inertia, Ig = 733,320 in
4

N.A. to top, yt = 35.62 in.
N.A. to bottom, yb = 36.38 in.
P/S force eccentricity e = 31.380 in.
In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 2007 paragraph 4.6.2.6, the effec-
tive flange width of the concrete deck slab is taken as the tributary width.
For the interior beam, the b
slab
=9'-8" =116 in.
Tendons are split into two groups depending on which sign of moment they
resistnegative or positive. A tendon is considered to resist a positive moment
when it is located outside of the top fiber compression stress block and is con-
sidered to resist a negative moment when it is located outside of the bottom
fiber compression stress block. The compression stress block extends over a
1
fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.
determined:
sum of tendon areas
2
bottom
44 0.153 6.732 in
PT
A = =
2

distance from center of gravity of tendons to extreme compression fiber
( )
bottom
12 2 12 4 10 6 6 8 4 10
72 8 75 in
12 12 10 6 4
PT
y
+ + + +
= + =
+ + + +

specified tensile strength of prestressing steel 270 kip
pu
f =
Value reported by CSiBridge =270 kip
constant k (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)
243
2 1.04 2 1.04 0.28
270
py
pu
f
k
f
| |
| |
= = =
| |
\ .
\ .

1
stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
5.7.2.2 based on the composite slab
c
f

1
shall be taken as 0.85 for concrete strength not exceeding 4.0 ksi. If
c
f >4 ksi, then
1
shall be reduced at a rate of 0.05 for each 1.0 ksi of
strength in excess of 4.0 ksi. Since
c
f =4 ksi,
1
=0.85.
Value calculated by CSiBridge =0.85 (not reported)
The distance c between neutral axis and the compressive face is evaluated in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-4.
bottom
1 slab bottom
bottom
0.85
6.732*270
5.314in
270
0.85 4 0.85 116 0.28 6.732
75
PT pu
pu
c PT
PT
A f
c
f
f b k A
y
=
+
= =
+

Value calculated by CSiBridge =5.314 in
The distance c is compared to the composite slab thickness to determine if
the c needs to be re-evaluated to include the precast beam flange in the
equivalent compression block.
Since c =5.314 in <8 in, the c is valid.
ps
AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1.
bottom
5.314
1 270 1 0.28 264.64ksi
75
ps pu
PT
c
f f k
y
| | | |
= = =
|
|
\ .
\ .

Value reported by CSiBridge =264.643 ksi
n
is calculated in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 7 - 23
Since the section is rectangular,
1
bottom bottom
5.314 0.85
6.732 264.64 75
2 2
129593.17 12 10799.4kip-ft
n PT ps PT
c
M A f y
| | | |
= =
| |
\ . \ .
= =

Value calculated by CSiBridge =10799 kip-ft (not reported)
n
by .
0.9 10799.4 9719.5kip-ft
r n
M M = = =
Value reported by CSiBridge =9719.5 kip-ft (116633.5 kip-in)
7.2 CAN/CSA-S6-06
This section describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the CAN/CSA-S6-
06 code for design and stress check when the superstructure has a deck that in-
cludes precast I or U girders with composite slabs. The algorithm is based on
the Simplified Method of Analysis, as described in CSA Section 5.7.1.
For PrecastComp design in CSiBridge each beam and tributary composite slab
is designed separately. Moments and shears due to live load are distributed to
individual beams in accordance with the factors specified in CSA Clauses
5.7.1.2.1.2 and 5.7.1.4.1.2. When CSiBridge calculates the Live Load Distribu-
tion Factors (LLDFs), the section and span qualification criteria stated in CSA
5.7.1.1 are verified and non-compliant sections are not designed. In accordance
with CSA Table 5.1 the bridge deck is classified as Bridge Type C.
With respect to shear and torsion check in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9,
torsion is ignored.
7.2.1 Stress Design
(Chapter 4):

FactorCompLim
c
c
f is multiplied by
the FactorCompLim to obtain the compression limit.
FactorTensLim
c
c
f ' is
multiplied by the FactorTensLim to obtain the tension limit.
7 - 24 CAN/CSA-S6-06
the left corner, the centerline beam, and the right corner of the composite slab
beam top and bottom fibers depend on the type of precast beam present in the
section cut. The locations are labeled in the output plots and tables.
Concrete strength
c
f is read at every point, and compression and tension lim-
its are evaluated using the FactorCompLim -
c
f multiplier and FactorTen-
sLim - f ' c multiplier.
7.2.2 Shear Design

Highway Class Highway Class in accordance with CSA clause 1.4.2.2; De-
termine F and C
f
factors.
FactRupture - multiplies sqrt
c
Value =0.40.
Clause 8.9.3.8, Default Value =0.210
3
.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 7 - 25
Clause 8.9.3.8, Default Value =3.010
3
.
7.2.2.1 Variables
A
CT
A
ps
Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the member,
A
vl
Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the mem-
A
VS
A
VSmin
b
v
Minimum web width of beam
d
compslab
Depth of composite slab (includes concrete haunch t2)
d
girder
Depth of girder
d
PTBot
Distance from the top of the composite slab to the center of gravity
of tendons in the bottom of the precast beam
d
v
Effective shear depth in accordance with CSA 8.9.1.5
E
s
E
c
E
p
Pestressing steel Youngs modulus
f
pu
M
f
7 - 26 CAN/CSA-S6-06
N
f
Applied factored axial force taken as positive if tensile
V
f
Factored shear demand per girder, excluding force in tendons
V
p
p
f
V
2c
Shear in Section Cut, excluding force in tendons
V
2tot
Shear in Section Cut, including force in tendons
x
Longitudinal strain in accordance with CSA Clause 8.9.3.8 of the
code
xlimmin,
xlimmax
Max and min value of longitudinal strain as specified by the user
in the Design Parameters
The shear resistance is determined in accordance with CSA paragraph 8.9.3. of
the code (sectional design model derived from Modified Compression Field
Theory). The procedure assumes that the concrete shear stresses are distributed
uniformly over an area b
v
wide and d
v
deep, that the direction of principal com-
pressive stresses (defined by angle ) remains constant over d
v
, and that the
conditions at just one location in the web. For design, the user should select on-
width, measured parallel to the neutral axis, between the resultants of the ten-
sile and compressive forces as a result of flexure.
Shear design is completed on a per-girder basis. Please refer to Chapter 3 for a
7.2.2.3 Algorithms
units to N, mm.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 7 - 27
two new force demand sets are generated. The new force demand sets are
built up from the maximum tension values of P and the maximum and mini-
mum values of V2 and minimum values of M3 of the two StepTypes (Max
and Min) present in the envelope COMBO case. The StepType of these new
force demand sets are named MaxM3MinV2 and MinM3MaxV2, respective-
ly. The signs of all force components are preserved. The two new cases are
added to comply with industry practice where sections are designed for ex-
treme shear and moments that are not necessarily corresponding to the same
design vehicle position. The section cut is designed for all four StepTypes in
the COMBOMax, Min, MaxM3MinV2, and MinM3MaxV2and the con-
trolling StepType is reported.
In cases where the demand moment M
f
> |V
f
V
p
|

d
v
, two new force demand
sets are generated, as follows:
M
f pos
= |V
f
V
p
|d
v pos

M
f neg
=|V
f
V
p
|d
v neg
.

2 2tot
girders
c
p
V V
V
n
=
v
If M
f
>0, then d
v
=max(0.72d
girder
,0.9d
PTbot
).
If M
u
<0, then d
v
=max(0.72d
girder
,0.9d
PTtop
).
The demand/capacity (D/C) ratio is calculated based on the maximum per-
missible shear capacity at a section in accordance with CSA Section 8.9.3.3.

0.25
f p
c c v v
V V
D
C f b d
=

7 - 28 CAN/CSA-S6-06
x
numerator
0.5 0.7
f
x f p f ps pu
v
M
V V N A f
d
= + +
xdenominator
=2(E
p
A
ps
)
If
xdenominator
=0 and
xnumerator
0 and then
x
=
xlimpos
and
if
xnumerator
<0, then
xdenominator
=2(E
p
A
ps
+ E
c
A
ct
).
Evaluate (CSA eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).
numerator
denominator
x
x
x

of the section.
If
girder
0.4 ,
f
c
N
f
A
> then
x
=2
x
.
quest.
x
=max(
x
,
xlimneg
) and
x
=min(
x
,
xlimpos
)
Evaluate the angle of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as de-
termined in CSA Clause 8.9.3.7.
18 29 +7000
x
45
0.4
0.525
1 150
x
=
+

CAN/CSA-S6-06 7 - 29
V
c
=2.5
c
f
cr
b
v
d
v
where f
cr
<3.2 MPa
Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by the rebar and de-
termine the amount of required transverse reinforcement per unit of length
CSA Clause 8.9.3.5.
V
s
=|V
f
V
p
| V
c

If V
s
=0, then A
vs
=0; else
=
.
1
tan
s
vs
s y v
V
A
f d

Check against minimum transverse shear reinforcement in accordance with
CSA Clause 8.9.1.2 and 8.9.1.3.
If |V
f
|>0.2
c
f
cr
b
v
d
v
+0.5
p
|V
p
|, then

min
0.15
;
cr v
vs
y
f b
A
f
=
else
min
0.
VS
A =
If < 0,
S
V then =
min
;
VS VS
A A else =
min
max( , ).
VS VS VS
A A A
Recalculate V
s
1
tan
s s y vs v
V f A d =

s
is not taken greater then V
f
.
( )
tens
0.5 1
0.5
tan
u p s
f
f
v
vl
s y
V V V
M
N
d
A
f

+ +

7 - 30 CAN/CSA-S6-06
Evaluate the longitudinal rebar on the flexure compression side in accor-
dance with CSA Clause 8.9.3.12 where V
s
f
.
( )
comp
1
0.5 0.5
tan
f
f u p s
v
vl
s y
M
N V V V
d
A
f
+

moment sign.
If M
f
<0, then A
vltop
=A
vltens
and A
vlbot
=A
vlcomp
;
else A
vltop
=A
vlcomp
and A
vlbot
=A
vltens
.
Highway Class Highway Class in accordance with CSA clause 1.4.2.2; De-
termine F and C
f
factors.
PhP Resistance Factor for prestressing strands; Default Value =0.95
PhiS Resistance Factor for reinforcing bars; Default Value =0.90
7.2.3.1 Variables
A
PS
Area of PT in tension zone
A
S
A
slab
Effective area of slab
a Depth of equivalent stress block in accordance with CSA 8.8.3.
b
slab
Effective slab width
b
webeq
Thickness of beam web
CAN/CSA-S6-06 7 - 31
d
P
Distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the pre-
stressing tendons in the tension zone
d
S
Distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of rebar in
the tension zone
f
ps
Average stress in prestressing steel (CSA Clause 8.8.4.2)
f
pu
Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted aver-
f
py
Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of
f
y
M
r
t
slabeq
Thickness of composite slab
1
specified concrete strength as specified in CSA Clause 8.8.3
1
Factor as specified in CSA Clause 8.8.3
1 s c
f over a zone bounded by the
at the distance a =
1
1
is taken as
0.97 0.0025
c
f

except that
1
is not to be taken to be less than 0.67.
7 - 32 CAN/CSA-S6-06
stressed or not, have f
pe
pu
(specified
tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not be considered for the flexural
capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.
in the section local axis. The effective width of the flange (slab) in compression
7.2.3.3 Algorithms
At each section:
units to N, mm.
The slab effective width is evaluated based on CSA Clause 5.8.2.1.

1
and
1
stress block factors are evaluated in accordance with CSA 8.8.3
based on section .
c
f
1
=0.85 0.0015
c
f 0.67
1
=0.97 0.0025
c
f 0.67
The tendon and rebar location, area and material are read. Only bonded ten-
stress block, and it is considered to resist a negative moment when it is lo-
cated outside the bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression
stress block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section
and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a =
1
c
from the extreme compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicu-
lar to the neutral axis.
CAN/CSA-S6-06 7 - 33
determined:
sum of tendon areas A
PS

center of gravity of tendons d
P

specified tensile strength of prestressing steel f
pu

constant k
2 1.04
| |
=
|
\ .
py
pu
f
k
f

s

distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of tension rebar d
s

Positive moment resistance first it is assumed that the equivalent compres-
and the compressive face is calculated in accordance with CSA Clause
C8.8.4.1.
+
=
+
1 1 slab
P PS PU c s s
pu
c c PS
p
A f A f
c
f
f b kA
d

The distance c is compared to the slab thickness. If the distance to the neutral
axis c is larger than the composite slab thickness, the distance c is re-
evaluated. For this calculation, the beam flange width and area are converted
to their equivalents in slab concrete by multiplying the beam flange width by
the modular ratio between the precast girder concrete and the slab concrete.
The web width in the equation for c is substituted for the effective converted
girder flange width. The distance c is recalculated in accordance with CSA
Clause C8.8.4.1.
7 - 34 CAN/CSA-S6-06
( ) 1 slab webeq slabeq
1 1 webeq
+
=
+
P PS PU s s c c
pu
c c PA
p
A f A f f b b t
c
f
f b kA
d

If the calculated value of c exceeds the sum of the deck thickness and the
equivalent precast girder flange thickness, the program assumes the neutral
axis is below the flange of the precast girder and recalculates c. The term
( ) 0.85
c w
f b b in the calculation is broken into two terms; one refers to the
contribution of the deck to the composite section flange, and the second re-
fers to the contribution of the precast girder flange to the composite girder
flange.
ps
Clause 8.8.4.2.
1
| |
=
|
\ .
PS PU
p
c
f f f
d

r
C8.8.4.1.
( )
| | | | | |
= + +
| | |
\ . \ . \ .
slabeq
1 1 1
1 slab webeq slabeq
;
2 2 2 2
t
c c c
else

1 1
.
2 2
r p PS PS p s S y s
c c
M A f d A f d
| | | |
= +
| |
\ . \ .

Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets, and
This chapter describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the Eurocode
2 EN 1992-1-1:2004 and EN 1992-2:2005 for design of superstructure deck
that includes precast I or U girders with composite slabs.
For PrecastComp design in CSiBridge each beam and its tributary composite
slab is designed separately. Moments and shears due to live load are distributed
to individual beans in accordance with the live load distribution method speci-
fied in the Design Request. Torsion effects are ignored.
7.3.1 Stress Design

FactorCompLim f
ck
ck
is multiplied by
the FactorCompLim to obtain concrete compression limit.
FactorTensLim - f
ctk
ctk
is multiplied by
the FactorTensLim to obtain concrete tension limit.
the left corner, the centerline beam, and the right corner of the composite slab
beam top and bottom fibers depend on the type of precast beam present in the
section cut. The locations are labeled in the output plots and tables
pression and tension limits are evaluated using the FactorCompLim - f
ck
mul-
tiplier and FactorTensLim - f
ctk
multiplier.
which method for determining LLDF has been specified in the design request
orded.

c

sreb

sPT

prePT
pk
to obtain stress in
tendons after losses. Typical values are between 0.4 and 0.9.
specified in Section 6.1:
design stress/strain relationship given in EN 1992-1-1 clause 3.1.7 (Figure
7.5). The factor , defining the effective height of the compression zone and
the factor , defining the effective strength, follow from:
= 0.8 for f
ck
50 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.19)
= 0.8 (f
ck
50)/400 for 50 <f
ck
90 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.20)
and
=1.0 for f
ck
50 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.21)
=1.0 (f
ck
50)/200 for 50 <f
ck
90 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 3.22)


Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004
sign curves in EN 1992-1-1 Figures 3.2 and 3.3 (Figures 7.6 and 7.7).

Reinforcing Steel for Tension and Compression
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004

A
c
A
s
F
s
d

x

x

3
cu
cd
t
B
A
B
A Idealized
Design
( ) t y
k
k f f =
yk s
kf
yk
kf
yd s
f E ud
uk

yd yk s
f f =
yk
f
yk
kf

Prestressing Steel, Absolute Values are Shown for Tensile Stress and Strain
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1:2004
the stresses in the tendons. CSiBridge determines the initial strain by multip-
lying the prestressing steel tensile strength f
pk
by user specified factor e
prePT
and dividing it by Youngs modulus.
The limit on mean compressive strain in accordance with EN 1992-1-1,
clause 6.1 (5) for sections in concentric loading is not considered in the CSi-
Bridge algorithm.
7.3.2.2 Algorithms
At each section and each beam:
The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the slab tributary area
slab
slabeq
slab
A
t
b
=
The tendon and rebar locations, areas, and materials are read. Only bonded
tendons are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.
superelevation are applied. This is consistent with the demands being re-
B
A
B
A Idealized
Design
pk s
k
pd p
f E ud
uk

0.1 pd p k s
f f =
0.1 p k
f
pk
k
ported in the section local axis. The entire composite slab tributary width is
considered as effective in compression.
The ultimate moment resistance of a section is determined by using strain
compatibility method, by iterative approach. The following steps are used:
1) The position of he neutral axis is assumed and strains in individual rebars
and tendons are calculated. Bars and tendons falling within the concrete
compression zone are ignored.
slabeq
is a T-section or rectangular section. If x > t
slabeq
the section is a T-
section.
equal (the acceptance criterion is | | { }
conc rebar conc
0.001*
PT
abs F F F F + <= ),
the neural axis depth is adjusted accordingly and the procedure returns to
Step 1.
on bonded tendons and mild steel located in tension zone as defined in the
Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located in compression
zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined tendons in a section,
prePT
* f
pk
. If a certain
7.3.3 Shear Design

c

sreb

sPT
angle - The angle between the concrete compression strut and the beam
axis perpendicular to the shear force.

l
- Factor for the transmission length of PT, used in shear resistance equa-
tion (EN 1992-1-1 6.4).
Inner Arm Method - Method that will be used to calculate the inner lever arm
z of section. Options are based on defined PT; based on defined rebar; based
on defined PT and rebar; multiplier of section depth.
Inner Arm Limit - Factor that multiplies the depth of the section to get the
lower limit of the inner lever arm z of the section (z Inner Arm Limit * Sec-
tion Depth).
Effective depth limit - Factor that multiplies the depth of the section to get
the lower limit of the effective depth to tensile reinforcement d of the section
(d = Effective depth limit * Section Depth).
Type of section Type of section for shear design; options are program de-
termined; prestressed; non-prestressed. If the program determined option is
used and at least one bonded tendon (regardless if stressed or not) is defined
in the section cut, the section is classified as prestressed.
Determining Factor
1
1
;
options are program determined or user defined. If the program determined
1
= ; where is determined
as follows:
( ) 0.6 1 in MPa
250
ck
ck
f
v f
(
=
(

If the design stress of the shear reinforcement is below 80% of the characte-
ristic yield stress f
yk
,
1
is taken as:
1
= 0.6 for f
ck
60 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 6.10.aN)
1
= 0.9 f
ck
/ 200 >0.5 for f
ck
60 MPa (EN 1992-1-1 6.10.bN)
Factor
1
user defined value of factor
1
.
Determining Factor
cw
cw
.
Options are program determined or user defined. If the program determined
cw
as follows:

( )
( )
1 for 0 0.25
1.25 for 0.25 0.5
2.5 1 for 0.5 1.0
cp cd cp cd
cd cp cd
cp cd cd cp cd
f f
f f
f f f
+ <
< <
<

Factor
cw
- user defined value for factor
cw
used to take account of compres-
sion in the shear area.
Factor f
ywk
- Multiplier of vertical shear rebar characteristic yield strength to
obtain a stress limit in shear rebar used in equation (EN 1992-1-1 6.10aN).
Typical values are 0.8 to 1.0
7.3.3.1 Variables
A
k
A
rebarbot
, A
rebartop
member
A
PTbot
, A
PTtop
member
A
st
A
sw
A
swmin
b Minimum web width of the beam
girder
d Depth of girder
d
PTbot
Distance from top fiber to center of prestressing steel near the bottom
fiber
d
PTtop
Distance from bottom fiber to center of prestressing steel near the top
fiber
f
cd
Design compression strength of concrete
f
yd
Design yield strength of steel reinforcement
f
yk
Characteristic yield strength of steel reinforcement
M
Ed
Ultimate design moment demand
N
Ed
Applied factored axial force, taken as positive if compression
V
Ed
Ultimate design shear force demand per beam excluding force in
tendons
V
p
p
Ed
the component is re-
c
V
2
Shear in section cut excluding force in tendons.
V
2tot
Shear in section cut including force in tendons.
z Inner arm length.
width, measured parallel to the neutral axis.
The Shear Design is completed on a per beam basis. The D/C ratio is calcu-
lated and the required area of rebar is reported for each beam. For a description
of distribution of live and other loads into individual beams, please refer to
Chapter 3. Section torsion moments are ignored.
7.3.3.3 Algorithm
units to N, mm.
and the signs of the P, V2, and M3 are preserved. The ABS case follows the

2 2tot
web
c
p
V V
V
n
=
Inner lever arm z is determined based on the stress-strain compatibility me-
thod described in Section 7.3.2.2 of this manual. The calculated inner arm z
is compared against the minimum threshold specified in the design parameter
Inner Arm Limit as z Inner Arm Limit * Section Depth.
The effective depth of the section d of the prestressed sections is determined
as follows:
If M
Ed
girder
, d
PTbot
)
If M
Ed
girder
, d
PTtop
)
The effective depth of the section d of the non-prestressed sections is deter-
mined as follows:
If M
Ed
girder
, d
rebarbot
)
If M
Ed
girder
, d
rebartop
)
1
If M
Ed
>0, then
1
=min(0.02, A
PTbot
/b
w
d)
If M
Ed
<0, then
1
=min(0.02, A
PTtop
/b
w
d)
1
lows:
If M
Ed
>0, then
1
=min(0.02, A
rebarbot
/b
w
d)
If M
Ed
<0, then
1
=min(0.02, A
rebartop
/b
w
d)
termined as:
( )
13
, , 1 1
100
Rd c Rd c ck cp w
V C k f k b d
(
= +

with a minimum of

V V k b d = +
where:
f
ck
is in MPa

1
200
1 2.0with in mm k d
d
= +
In prestressed continuous or uncracked single span members, the shear resis-
( )
2
, 1
w
Rd c ctd cp ctd
I b
V f f
S
= +
where
I is the second moment of area
b
w
is the width of the cross-section at the centroidal axis, allowing
for the presence of ducts, in accordance with equations (EN
1992-1-1 6.16 and 6.17)
S is the first moment of area above and about the centroidal axis
cp
is the concrete compressive stress at the centroidal axis caused
by axial loading and/or prestressing
( )
cp Ed c Ed
N A N = >

l
- Factor for transmission length of PT, defined in design parame-
ters
Ratio of V
Ed
over V
Rd,c
is calculated as

,
,
Ratio
Ed
Ed Rd c
Rd c
V
V V
V
=
The design value of maximum shear force that can be sustained by the web,
limited by crushing of the compression strut, is evaluated as:

( )
,max 1
cot tan
Rd cw w cd
V b z v f = +
Ratio of V
Ed
over V
R,max
is calculated as

,max
,max
Ratio
Ed
Ed R
R
V
V V
V
=
If V
Ed
>V
Rd,c
ywk
<0.8, then the required
area of vertical shear reinforcement per unit length is calculated as:

( )
cot
Ed sw
ywk ywk
V A
s Factor f z f
=

If V
Ed
>V
Rd,c
ywk
0.8, then the required
area of vertical shear reinforcement per unit length is calculated as:

cot
Ed sw
ywd
V A
s z f
=

lated as:

min
0.08
ck sw
yk
f A
b
s f
=

0.5 cot
Ed
sl
yld
V
A
f
=

Section Properties 8- 1
Chapter 8
Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab
This chapter describes the algorithms CSiBridge applies when designing steel
I-beam with composite slab superstructures in accordance with the AASHTO
LRFD 2008 Edition, Section 6 or Appendix A.
8.1 Section Properties
8.1.1 Yield Moments
8.1.1.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive yield moment, M
y
, is determined by the program in accordance
with AASHTO LRFD 2008 Section D6.2.2 using the following user-defined
input, which is part of the Design Request (see Chapter 4 for more information
about Design Request).
M
dnc
= The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the factored permanent load applied
before the concrete deck has hardened or is made composite.
M
dc
= The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the remainder of the factored perma-
nent load (applied to the composite section).
CSiBridge Superstructure Design Guide
8 - 2 Section Properties
The program solves for M
AD
from the following equation,

dnc dc AD
yt
NC LT ST
M M M
F
S S S
= + + (AASHTO LRFD 2008 D6.2.2-1)
and then calculates yield moment based on the following equation
y dnc dc AD
M M M M = + + (AASHTO LRFD 2008 D6.2.2-2)
where
S
NC
= Noncomposite section modulus (in.
3
)
S
LT
= Long-term composite section modulus (in.
3
)
S
ST
= Short-term composite section modulus (in.
3
)
M
y
is taken as the lesser value calculated for the compression flange, M
yc
,
or the tension flange, M
yt
. The positive M
y
is calculated only once based
on M
dnc
and M
dc
demands specified by the user in the Design Request. It
should be noted that the M
y
calculated in the procedure described here is
used by the program only to determine M
npos
for a compact section in
positive bending in a continuous span, where the nominal flexural resis-
tance may be controlled by M
y
in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD
2008 eq. 6.10.7.1.2-3).
1.3
n h y
M R M s
8.1.1.2 Composite Section in Negative Flexure
For composite sections in negative flexure, the procedure described for positive
yield moment is followed, except that the composite section for both short-term
and long-term moments consists of the steel section and the longitudinal rein-
forcement within the tributary width of the concrete deck. Thus, S
ST
and S
LT
are
the same value. Also, M
yt
is taken with respect to either the tension flange or
the longitudinal reinforcement, whichever yields first.
The negative M
y
is calculated only once based on the M
dnc
and M
dc
demands
specified by the user in the Design Request. It should be noted that the M
y
cal-
culated in the procedure described here is used by the program solely to deter-
mine the limiting slenderness ratio for a compact web corresponding to 2D
cp
/t
w

in (AASHTO LRFD 2008 eq. A6.2.1-2).
Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-BeamBridge with Composite Slab
Section Properties 8 - 3

( )
| |
= s
|
\ . | |
|
\ .
2
0.54 0.09
cp
yc
cp
rw pw D
c
p
h y
E
F
D
D
M
R M
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-2)
and web plastification factors in (AASHTO LRFD 2008 eqs. A.6.2.2-4 and
A6.2.2-5).

( )
( )
( | |
| |
= s ( |
|
|

(
\ .
\ .

1 1
c
c
w pw D h yc p p
pc
p rw yc yc pw D
R M M M
R
M M M

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A.6.2.2-4)

( )
( )
( | |
| |
= s ( |
|
|

(
\ .
\ .

1 1
c
c
w pw D h yt p p
pt
p rw yt yt pw D
R M M M
R
M M M

8.1.2 Plastic Moments
8.1.2.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive plastic moment, M
p
, is calculated as the moment of the plastic
forces about the plastic neutral axis. Plastic forces in the steel portions of a
cross-section are calculated using the yield strengths of the flanges, the web,
and reinforcing steel, as appropriate. Plastic forces in the concrete portions of
the cross-section that are in compression are based on a rectangular stress block
with the magnitude of the compressive stress equal to 0.85 .
c
f ' Concrete in ten-
sion is neglected. The position of the plastic neutral axis is determined by the
equilibrium condition that there is no net axial force.
The plastic moment of a composite section in positive flexure is determined by:
Calculating the element forces and using them to determine if the plastic neu-
tral axis is in the web, top flange, or concrete deck
Calculating the location of the plastic neutral axis within the element deter-
mined in the first step
Calculating Mp.
Equations for the various potential locations of the plastic neutral axis (PNA)
are given in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Calculation of PNA and M
p
for Sections in Positive Flexure
Case PNA Condition Y and M
p

I In Web P
t
+ P
w
> P
c
+ P
s
+ P
rb
+ P
n

( )
| |
( | |
= +
| (
\ .

(
= + + + + + +

2
2
1
2
2
t c s rt rb
w
w
p s s rt rt rb rb c c t t
D P P P P P
Y
P
P
M Y D Y Pd P d P d Pd Pd
D

II
In Top
Flange
P
t
+ P
w
+ P
c
> P
s
+ P
rb
+ P
n

( ) | |
| | ( +
= +
| (
\ .

(
= + + + + + +

2
2
1
2
2
c w t s rt rb
c
c
p c s s n n rb rb w w t t
c
t P P P P P
Y
P
P
M Y t Y Pd P d P d P d Pd
t

III
Concrete
Deck
Below
P
rb

P
t
+ P
w
+ P
c
>
2
rb
c
t
| |
|
\ .
P
s
+ P
rb
+ P
n

( )
| |
( + +
=
(

| |
= + + + + +
|
\ .
2
2
c w t rt rb
s
s
s
p rt rt rb rb c c w w t t
s
P P P P P
Y t
P
Y P
M P d P d P d P d Pd
t

IV
Concrete
Deck at
P
rb

P
t
+ P
w
+ P
c
+ P
rb
>
rb
s
c
t
| |
|
\ .
P
s
+ P
n

| |
2
2
rb
s
p rt rt c c w w t t
s
Y c
Y P
M P d P d P d Pd
t
=
| |
= + + + +
|
\ .

V
Concrete
Deck
Above
P
rb
and
Below
P
rt

P
t
+ P
w
+ P
c
+ P
rb
>
rt
s
c
t
| |
|
\ .
P
s
+ P
n

( )
| |
2
2
rb c w t rt
s
s
s
s
P P P P P
Y t
P
Y P
t
+ + + (
=
(

| |
= + + + + +
|
\ .

VI
Concrete
Deck at
P
rt

P
t
+ P
w
+ P
c
+ P
rb
+ P
n
>
rt
s
c
t
| |
|
\ .
P
s

| |
2
2
rt
s
p rb rb c c w w t t
s
Y c
Y P
M P d P d P d Pd
t
=
| |
= + + + +
|
\ .

VII
Concrete
Deck
Above
P
rt

P
t
+ P
w
+ P
c
+ P
rb
+ P
rt
<
rt
s
c
t
| |
|
\ .
P
s

( )
| |
2
2
rb c w t rt
s
s
s
s
P P P P P
Y t
P
Y P
t
+ + + + (
=
(

| |
= + + + + +
|
\ .

s
b
s
t
c
t
t
t
c
b
t
b
w
t
D
rt
A
rb
A
rt
P
t
P
w
P
c
P
rb
P
s
P
CASE I CASE II
CASES III-VII
PNA
PNA
PNA
Y Y
Y
rt
C
rb
C
s
b
s
t
c
t
t
t
c
b
t
b
w
t
D
rt
A
rb
A
rt
P
t
P
w
P
c
P
rb
P
s
P
CASE I CASE II
CASES III-VII
PNA
PNA
PNA
Y Y
Y
rt
C
rb
C

Next the section is checked for ductility requirement in accordance with
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 eq. 6.10.7.3)
D
p
s 0.42D
t

where D
p
is the distance from the top of the concrete deck to the neutral axis of
the composite section at the plastic moment, and D
t
is the total depth of the
composite section. At the section where the ductility requirement is not satis-
fied, the plastic moment of a composite section in positive flexure is set to
zero.
8.1.2.2 Composite Section in Negative Flexure
The plastic moment of a composite section in negative flexure is calculated by
an analogous procedure. Equations for the two cases most likely to occur in
practice are given in Table 8-2. The plastic moment of a noncomposite section
is calculated by eliminating the terms pertaining to the concrete deck and longi-
tudinal reinforcement from the equations in Tables 8-1 and 8-2 for composite
sections.
p
for Sections in Negative Flexure
Case PNA Condition
Y and M
p

I In Web P
c
+ P
w
> P
t
+ P
rb
+ P
n

( )
| |
2
2
1
2
2
c t rt rb
w
w
p n n rb rb t t l l
D P P P P
Y
P
P
M Y D Y P d P d Pd Pd
D
| | (
= +
|
(
\ .

(
= + + + + +

p
for Sections in Negative Flexure
Case PNA Condition
Y and M
p

II
In Top
Flange
P
c
+ P
w
+ P
t
> P
rb
+ P
n

( ) | |
2
2
1
2
2
l w c rt rb
t
t
p l n n rb rb w w c c
l
t P P P P
Y
P
P
M Y t Y P d P d P d Pd
t
| | (
= +
|
(
\ .

(
= + + + + +

rt
P
rb
P
t
P
w
P
c
P
s
t
t
t
c
t
D
c
b
c
b
w
t
rt
A
rb
A
PNA
Y
CASE V
CASE I CASE II
PNA
Y
rt
P
rb
P
t
P
w
P
c
P
s
t
t
t
c
t
D
c
b
c
b
w
t
rt
A
rb
A
rt
A
rb
A
PNA
Y
PNA
Y
CASE V
CASE I CASE II
PNA
Y
PNA
Y

in which
P
rt
= F
yrt
A
rt
P
s
= 0.85
c
f ' b
s
t
s
P
rb
= F
yrb
A
rb
P
c
= F
yc
b
c
t
c
P
w
= F
yw
Dt
w
P
t
= F
yt
b
t
t
t

In the equations for M
p
given in Tables 8-1 and 8-2, d is the distance from an
element force to the plastic neutral axis. Element forces act at (a) mid-thickness
for the flanges and the concrete deck, (b) mid-depth of the web, and (c) center
of reinforcement. All element forces, dimensions, and distances are taken as
positive. The conditions are checked in the order listed in Tables 8-1 and 8-2.
8.1.3 Section Classification and Factors
8.1.3.1 Compact or Non-Compact Positive Flexure
The program determines if the section can be qualified as compact based on the
following criteria:
the specified minimum yield strengths of the flanges do not exceed 70.0 ksi,
the web satisfies the requirement of AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article (6.10.2.1.1),
150
w
D
t
s
the section satisfies the web slenderness limit,

2
3.76 .
cp
w yc
D
E
t F
s (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.6.2.2-1)
The program does not verify if the composite section is kinked (chorded) con-
tinuous or horizontally curved.
8.1.3.2 Design in Accordance with Appendix A
The program determines if a section qualifies to be designed using Appendix A
of the AASHTO LRFD 2008 Edition based on the following criteria:
the Design Request Parameter Use Appendix A? is set to Yes (see Chapter
4 for more information about setting parameters in the Design Request),
the specified minimum yield strengths of the flanges do not exceed 70.0 ksi,
the web satisfies the noncompact slenderness limit,

2
5.7
c
w yc
D E
t F
< (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.6.2.3-1)
the flanges satisfy the following ratio,
0.3.
yc
yt
I
I
> (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.6.2.3-2)
The program does not verify if the composite section is kinked (chorded) con-
tinuous or horizontally curved.
8.1.3.3 Hybrid Factor R
h
Composite Section Positive Flexure
For rolled shapes, homogenous built-up sections, and built-up sections with a
higher-strength steel in the web than in both flanges, R
h
is taken as 1.0. Other-
wise the hybrid factor is taken as:

( ) + |
=
+ |
3
12 3
12 2
h
R (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-1)
where
= the smaller of and 1.0
yw n
F f
| =
2
n w
fn
D t
A
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-2)
A
fn
= bottom flange area
D
n
= the distance from the elastic neutral axis of the cross-section to
the inside face of bottom flange
F
n
= f
y
of the bottom flange
h
Composite Section Negative Flexure
h

( ) + |
=
+ |
3
12 3
12 2
h
R (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-1)
where
| =
2
n w
fn
D t
A
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-2)
yw n
F f
A
fn
= Flange area on the side of the neutral axis corresponding to D
n
.
If the top flange controls, then the area of longitudinal rebar in
the slab is included in calculating A
fn
.
D
n
= The larger of the distances from the elastic neutral axis of the
cross-section to the inside face of either flange. For sections
where the neutral axis is at the mid-depth of the web, this dis-
tance is from the neutral axis to the inside face of the flange on
the side of the neutral axis where yielding occurs first.
F
n
= f
y
of the controlling flange. When the top flange controls, then
F
n
is equal to the largest of the minimum specified yield
strengths of the top flange or the longitudinal rebar in the slab.
h
Non Composite Section
h

( ) + |
=
+ |
3
12 3
12 2
h
R (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-1)
where
yw n
F f
| =
2
n w
fn
D t
A
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-2)
A
fn
= Flange area on the side of the neutral axis corresponding to D
n
.
D
n
= The larger of the distances from the elastic neutral axis of the
cross-section to the inside face of either flange. For sections
where the neutral axis is at the mid-depth of the web, this dis-
tance is from the neutral axis to the inside face of the flange on
the side of the neutral axis where yielding occurs first.
F
n
= f
y
of the controlling flange.
8.1.3.6 Web Load-Shedding Factor R
b

When checking constructibility in accordance with the provisions of AASHTO
LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.2.1 or for composite sections in positive flexure, the
R
b
factor is taken as equal to 1.0. For composite sections in negative flexure,
the R
b
factor is taken as:

2
1 1.0
1200 300
wc
wc c
b rw
a w
a D
R
t

| || |
= s
| |
+
\ .
\ .

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.2)
where
= 5.7
rw
yc
E
F
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.2-4)

2
c w
wc
fc fc
D t
a
b t
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.2-5)
When the user specifies the Design Request parameter Do webs have longitu-
dinal stiffeners? as yes, the R
b
factor is set to 1.0 (see Chapter 4 for more in-
formation about specifying Design Request parameters).
8.1.3.7 Unbraced Length L
b
and Section Transitions
The program assumes that the top flange is continuously braced for all Design
Requests, except for Constructibility. For more information about flange lateral
bracing in a Constructibility Design Request, see Section 8.6 of this manual.
The unbraced length L
b
for the bottom flange is equal to the distance between
the nearest downstation and upstation qualifying cross diaphragms or span end
as defined in the Bridge Object [the preceding sentence needs to be clarified].
Some of the diaphragm types available in CSiBridge may not necessarily pro-
vide restraint to the bottom flange. The program assumes that the following
diaphragm qualifies as providing lateral restraint to the bottom flange: single
beam, all types of chords and braces except V braces without bottom beams.
The program calculates demands and capacities pertaining to a given section
cut at a given station without considering section transition within the unbraced
length. It does not search for the highest demands vs. the smallest resistance F
nc

Demand Sets 8 - 11
within the unbraced length as the code suggests. It is also setting the value of
the moment gradient modifier equal to 1.0. It is the responsibility of the user to
pay special attention to the section transition within the unbraced length and to
follow the guidelines in AASHTO LRFD C6.10.8.2.3.
8.2 Demand Sets
Demand Set combos (at least one is required) are user-defined combinations
based on LRFD combinations (see Chapter 4 for more information about speci-
fying Demand Sets). The demands from all specified demand combos are en-
veloped and used to calculate D/C ratios. The way the demands are used de-
pends on if the design parameter "Use Stage Analysis? is set to Yes or No.
If Use Stage Analysis? = Yes, the program reads the stresses on beams and
slabs directly from the section cut results. The program assumes that the effects
of the staging of loads applied to non-composite versus composite sections, as
well as the concrete slab material time dependent properties, were captured by
using the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case available in CSiBridge.
Note that the Design Request for staged constructibility check (Steel-I Comp
Construct Stgd) allows only Nonlinear Staged Construction load cases to be
used as Demand Sets.
If Use Stage Analysis? = No, the program decomposes load cases present in
every demand set combo to three Bridge Design Action categories: non-
composite, composite long term, and composite short term. The program uses
the load case Bridge Design Action parameter to assign the load cases to the
appropriate categories. A default Bridge Design Action parameter is assigned
to a load case based on its Design Type. However, the parameter can be over-
written: click the Analysis > Load Cases > {Type} > New command to dis-
play the Load Case Data {Type} form; click the Design button next to the
Load case type dropdown list; under the heading Bridge Design Action, select
the User Defined option and select a value from the list. The assigned Bridge
Designed Action values are handled by the program in the following manner:

8 - 12 Demand Sets
Table 8-3 Bridge Design Action
Bridge Design Action Value
Specified by the User
Bridge Design Action Category Used in
the Design Algorithm
Non-Composite Non-Composite
Long-Term Composite Long-Term Composite
Short-Term Composite Short-Term Composite
Staged Non-Composite
Other Non-Composite

8.2.1 Demand Flange Stresses f
bu
and f
f

Evaluation of the flange stress, f
bu
, calculated without consideration of flange
lateral bending is dependent on setting the Design Request parameter Use
Stage Analysis?

If the Use Stage Analysis? = No, then

NC LTC STC
bu
comp steel LTC STC
P M M M
f
A S S S
= + + +
where M
NC
is the demand moment on the non-composite section, M
LTC
is the
demand moment on the long-term composite section, and M
STC
is the demand
moment on the short-term composite section.
The short-term section modulus for positive moment is calculated by trans-
forming the concrete deck using the steel-to-concrete modular ratio. The long-
term section modulus for positive moment is calculated using a modular ratio
factored by n, where n is specified in the Design Parameter as the Modular
ratio long-term multiplier. The effect of compression reinforcement is ig-
nored. For negative moment, the concrete deck is assumed cracked and is not
included in the section modulus calculations while tension reinforcement is ac-
counted for.
If Use Stage Analysis? = Yes, then the f
bu
stresses on each flange are read di-
rectly from the section cut results. The program assumes that the effects of the
staging of loads applied to non-composite versus composite sections, as well as
Demand Sets 8 - 13
the concrete slab material time dependent properties, were captured by using
the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case available in CSiBridge.
In the Strength Design Check, the program verifies the sign of the stress in the
composite slab, and if stress is positive (tension), the program assumes that the
entire section cut demand moment is carried by the steel section only. This is to
reflect the fact that the concrete in the composite slab is cracked and does not
contribute to the resistance of the section. Flange stress f
f
, used in the Service
Design Check, is evaluated in the same manner as stress f
bu
, with one exception.
When the Steel Service Design Request parameter Does concrete slab resist
tension? is set to Yes, the program uses section properties based on a trans-
formed section that assumes the concrete slab to be fully effective in both ten-
sion and compression.
In the Constructibility checks, the program proceeds based on the status of the
concrete slab. When no slab is present or the slab is non-composite, the f
bu

stresses on each flange are read directly from the section cut results. When the
slab status is composite, the program verifies the sign of the stress in the com-
posite slab, and if stress is positive (tension), the program assumes that the en-
tire section cut demand moment is carried by the steel section only. This is to
reflect the fact that the concrete in the composite slab is cracked and does not
contribute to the resistance of the section.
8.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending Stress f
l

The flange lateral bending stress f
l
is evaluated only when all of the following
conditions are met:
Steel Girders has been selected for the deck section type (Components >
Superstructure Item > Deck Sections command) and the Girder Modeling
In Area Object Models Model Girders Using Area Objects option is set to
Yes on the Define Bridge Section Data Steel Girder form.
The bridge object is modeled using Area Objects. This option can be set us-
ing the Bridge > Update command to display the Update Bridge Structural
Model form; then select the Update as Area Object Model option.
Set the Live Load Distribution to Girders method to Use Forces Directly
from CSiBridge on the Bridge Design Request Superstructure {Code}
form, which displays when the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design >
8 - 14 Demand Sets
Design Requests command is used (see Chapter 3 for more information
about Live Load Distribution). Since there is no live load used in the Con-
structibility design, request this setting does not apply in that case.
In all other cases, the flange lateral bending stress is set to zero. The f
l
stresses
on each flange are read directly from the section cut results.
8.2.3 Depth of the Web in Compression
For composite sections in positive flexure, the depth of the web in compression
is computed using the following equation:
0
c
c fc
c t
f
D d t
f f
| |
= >
|
+
\ .
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 D6.3-1)

where
f
c
= Sum of the compression-flange stresses caused by the different loads, i.e.,
DC1, the permanent load acting on the noncomposite section; DC2, the
permanent load acting on the long-term composite section; DW, the wear-
ing surface load; and LL+IM; acting on their respective sections. f
c
is taken
as negative when the stress is in compression. Flange lateral bending is dis-
regarded in this calculation.
f
t
= Sum of the tension-flange stresses caused by the different loads. Flange lat-
eral bending is disregarded in this calculation.
For composite sections in negative flexure, D
c
is computed for the section con-
sisting of the steel girder plus the longitudinal reinforcement, with the excep-
tion of the following. For composite sections in negative flexure at the Service
Design Check Request where the concrete deck is considered effective in ten-
sion for computing flexural stresses on the composite section (Design Parame-
Strength Design Request 8 - 15
ter Does concrete slab resist tension? = Yes), D
c
is computed from AASHTO
LRFD 2008 Eq. D 6.3.1-1. For this case, the stresses f
c
and f
t
are switched, the
signs shown in the stress diagram are reversed, t
fc
is the thickness of the bottom
flange, and D
c
instead extends from the neutral axis down to the top of the bot-
tom flange.
8.3 Strength Design Request
The Strength Design Check calculates at every section cut positive flexural
capacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. It then compares the
capacities against the envelope of demands specified in the Design Request.
8.3.1 Flexure
8.3.1.1 Positive Flexure Compact
The nominal flexural resistance of the section is evaluated as follows:
If D
p
s 0.1 D
t
, then M
n
= M
p
; otherwise
1.07 0.7
p
n p
t
D
M M
D
| |
=
|
\ .
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.7.1.2-2)
In a continuous span, the nominal flexural resistance of the section is deter-
mined as
M
n
s 1.3R
h
M
y

where R
h
is a hybrid factor for the section in positive flexure.
The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as
1
1
3
DoverC max ,
0.6
u xt
l
f n yf
M f S
f
M F
| |
+
|
=
|
|
|
\ .

8.3.1.2 Positive Flexure Non-Compact
Nominal flexural resistance of the top compression flange is taken as:
F
nc
= R
b
R
h
F
yc
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.7.2.2-1)
8 - 16 Strength Design Request
Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom tension flange is taken as:
F
nt
= R
h
F
yt
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.7.2.2-1)
1
1
3
DoverC max , ,
0.6
bu
bu l
f nt f nc yf
f f
f f
F F F
| |
+
|
=
|
|
| |
\ .

8.3.1.3 Negative Flexure in Accordance with Article 6.10.8
The local buckling resistance of the compression flange F
nc(FLB)
as specified in
AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.8.2.2 is taken as:
If
f
s
pf
, then F
nc
= R
b
R
h
F
yc
. (6.10.8.2.2-1)
Otherwise

( | || |
=
( | |

( \ .\ .
1 1
yr f pf
nc b h yc
h yc rf pf
F
F R R F
R F
(6.10.8.2.2-2)
in which
=
2
fc
f
fc
b
t
(6.10.8.2.2-3)
0.38
pf
yc
E
F
= (6.10.8.2.2-4)
0.56
rf
yr
E
F
= (6.10.8.2.2-5)
F
yr
= Compression-flange stress at the onset of nominal yielding within
the cross-section, including residual stress effects, but not includ-
ing compression-flange lateral bending, taken as the smaller of
0.7F
yc
and F
yw
, but not less than 0.5 F
yc
.
The lateral torsional buckling resistance of the compression flange F
nc(LTB)
as
specified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article (6.10.8.2.3) is taken as follows:
If L
b
s L
p
, then F
nc
= R
b
R
h
F
yc
. (6.10.8.2.3-1)
If L
p
< L
b
s L
r
, then
1 1
yr b p
nc b b h yc b h yc
h yc r p
F L L
F C R R F R R F
R F L L
( | || |
= s
( | |
( \ .\ .
(6.10.8.2.3-2)
If L
b
> L
r
, then F
nc
= F
cr
s R
b
R
h
F
yc
(6.10.8.2.3-3)
in which
unbraced length, 1.0 ,
b p t r t
yc yr
E E
L L r L r
F F
= = = t
C
b
= 1 (moment gradient modifier)
2
2
b b
cr
b
t
C R E
F
L
r
t
=
| |
|
\ .
(6.10.8.2.3-8)
1
12 1
3
fc
t
c w
fc fc
b
r
D t
b t
=
| |
+
|
\ .
(6.10.8.2.3-9)
The nominal flexural resistance of the bottom compression flange is taken as
the smaller of the local buckling resistance and the lateral torsional buckling
resistance:
( ) ( ) FLB LTB
min ,
nc nc nc
F F F = (

The nominal flexural resistance of the top tension flange is taken as:
|
f h yf
R F (6.10.8.1.3-1)

1
1
1
3
DoverC max , ,
0.6
bu
bu
f m f h yf yc
f f
f f
F R F F
| |
+
|
=
|
|
| |
\ .

8.3.1.4 Negative Flexure in Accordance with Appendix A6
Sections that satisfy the following requirement qualify as compact web sec-
tions:

( )
2
cp
cp
pw D
w
D
t
s (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-2)
where

( ) 2
0.54 0.09
cp
yc
cp
pw D
c
p
h y
E
F D
D
M
R M
| |
= s
|
\ . | |
|
\ .
5.7
rw
yc
E
F
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-3)
D
c
= depth of the web in compression in the elastic range
D
cp
= depth of the web in compression at the plastic moment
Then web plastification factors are determined as

p
pc
yc
M
R
M
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-4)

p
pt
yt
M
R
M
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-5)
Sections that do not satisfy the requirement for compact web sections, but for
which the web slenderness satisfies the following requirement:

w rw
< (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-1)
where

2
c
w
w
D
t
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-2)
5.7
rw
yc
E
F
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-3)
The web plastification factors are taken as:

( )
( )
1 1
c
c
w pw D h yc p p
pc
p tw yc yc pw D
R M M M
R
M M M
( | |
| |
= s ( |
|
|

(
\ .
\ .


( )
( )
1 1
c
c
w pw D h yt p p
pt
p rw yt yt pw D
R M M M
R
M M M
( | |
| |
= s ( |
|
|

(
\ .
\ .

where

( ) ( )
c c
c
rw pw D pw D p
cp
D
D
| |
= s
|
\ .
The local buckling resistance of the compression flange M
ncFLB
as specified in
AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article A6.3.2 is taken as:
If ,
f pf
s then
nc pc yc
M R M = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-1)
Otherwise 1 1
yr xc f pf
nc pc yc
pc yc rf pf
F S
M R M
R M
( | || |
=
( | |

( \ .\ .

in which
2
fc
f
fc
b
t
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-3)
0.38
pf
yc
E
F
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-4)
0.95
c
rf
yr
Ek
F
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-5)
For built-up sections,
4
c
w
k
D
t
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-6)
For rolled shapes (eFramePropType =SECTION_I as defined in API function
SapObject.SapModel.PropFrame.GetNameList; PropType argument)
k
c
= 0.76
The lateral torsional buckling resistance of the compression flange M
ncLTB
as
specified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article A6.3.3 is taken as M
nc
= R
pc
M
yc
:
If ,
b p
L L > then .
nc pc yc
M R M = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-1)
If ,
p b r
L L L < s then
1 1
yr xc b p
nc b pc yc pc yc
pc yc r p
F S L L
M C R M R M
R M L L
( | || |
= s
( | |
( \ .\ .

If ,
b r
L L > then
nc cr xc pc yc
M F S R M = s (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-3)
in which
unbraced length,
b
L =
1.0
p t
yc
E
L r
F
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-4)
2
1.95 1 1 6.76
yr
xc
r t
yr xc
F
E J S h
L r
F S h E J
| |
= + +
|
\ .

1 moment gradient modifier.
b
C =
( )
( )
2
2
2
1 0.078
b
cr b t
xc
b t
C E J
F L r
S h
L r
t
= + (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-8)
3 3
3
1 0.63 1 0.63
3 3 3
fc ft fc ft ft ft
w
fc ft
b t t b t t
Dt
J
b b
| | | |
= + +
| |
\ . \ .

1
12 1
3
fc
t
c w
fc fc
b
r
D t
b t
=
| |
+
|
\ .
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-10)
The nominal flexural resistance of the bottom compression flange is taken as
the smaller of the local buckling resistance and the lateral torsional buckling
resistance:
( ) ( )
FLB LTB
min ,
nc nc nc
M M M = (

The nominal flexural resistance of the top tension flange is taken as:
f pt yt
R M |
1
1
1
3
DoverC max , ,
0.6
xc
u
f nc f pt yt yc
Mu f S
M f
M R M F
| |
+
|
=
|
|
| |
\ .

8.3.2 Shear
When processing the Design Request from the Design module, the program as-
sumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all web panels
as unstiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classification is
not sufficient to resist the demand specified in the Design Request, the program
recommends minimum stiffener spacing to achieve a Demand over Capacity
ratio equal to 1. The recommended stiffener spacing is reported in the result ta-
ble under the column heading d0req.
In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-
mize command), the user can specify stiffeners locations and the program re-
calculates the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies the web pan-
els as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria specified
in AASHTO LRFD 2008 section 6.10.9.1e. It should be noted that stiffeners
are not modeled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners
does not affect the magnitude of the demands.
8.3.2.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs
The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

n p
V CV = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.2-1)
in which
0.58
p yw w
V F Dt = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.2-2)
C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield strength
that is determined as follows:
If 1.12 ,
w yw
D Ek
t F
s then C = 1.0. (AASHTO LRFD 2008
6.10.9.3.2-4).
If 1.12 1.40 ,
yw w yw
Ek D Ek
F t F
< s then
1.12
.
yw
w
Ek
C
D
F
t
=

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-5)
If 1.40 ,
w yw
D Ek
t F
> then
2
1.57
,
yw
w
Ek
C
F
D
t
| |
=
|
| |
\ .
|
\ .

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-6)
in which
2
5
5 .
c
k
d
D
= +
| |
|
\ .
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-7)
8.3.2.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior Web Panels
The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel and with the section at
the section cut proportioned such that:

( )
2
2.5
w
fc fc ft ft
Dt
b t b t
s
+
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-1)
is taken as

( )
2
0.87 1
1
n p
o
C
V V C
d
D
(
= +
(
( | |
+
|
(
\ .

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-2)
in which 0.58
p yw w
V F Dt = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-3)
where
d
o
= transverse stiffener spacing.
Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

( )
2
0.87 1
1
n p
o o
C
V V C
d d
D D
(
= +
(
| |
(
| |
|
+ +
|
( |
\ .
\ .

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-8)
8.3.2.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels
The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:
V
n
= V
cr
= CV
p
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-1)
in which
0.58 .
p yw w
V F Dt = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-2)
8 - 24 Service Design Request
=
|
DoverC .
u
v n
V
V

8.4 Service Design Request
The Service Design Check calculates at every section cut stresses f
f
at the top
steel flange of the composite section and the bottom steel flange of the com-
posite section and compares them against limits specified in AASHTO LRFD
2008 Section 6.10.4.2.2.
For the top steel flange of composite sections:
DoverC
0 95
f
h yf
f
.
. R F
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.4.2.2-1)
For the bottom steel flange of composite sections:

2
DoverC
0 95
l
f
h yf
f
f
.
. R F
+
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.4.2.2-2)
For both steel flanges of noncomposite sections:

2
DoverC
0 80
l
f
h yf
f
f
.
. R F
+
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.4.2.2-3)
The flange stresses are derived in the same way as f
bu
stress demands (see sec-
tion 8.2.1 of this manual). The user has an option to specify if the concrete slab
resists tension or not by setting the Does concrete slab resist tension? Design
Request parameter. It is the responsibility of the user to verify if the slab quali-
fies, in accordance with Does concrete slab resist tension? section 6.10.4.2.1,
to resist tension.
For compact composite sections in positive flexure used in shored construction,
the longitudinal compressive stress in the concrete deck, determined as speci-
fied in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.1.1.1d, is checked against 0.6 .
c
f '
Service Design Request 8 - 25
DoverC = f
deck
/0.6
c
f '
Except for composite sections in positive flexure in which the web satisfies the
requirement of AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.2.1.1, all section cuts are
checked against the following requirement:
DoverC
c
crw
f
F
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.2.2-4)
where:
f
c
= Compression-flange stress at the section under consideration due to de-
mand loads calculated without consideration of flange lateral bending.
F
crw
= Nominal bend-buckling resistance for webs without longitudinal stiffen-
ers determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.1.9
2
0 9
crw
w
. Ek
F
D
t
=
| |
|
\ .
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.9.1-1)
but not to exceed the smaller of R
h
F
yc
and F
yw
/0.7. In which
k = bend buckling coefficient
( )
2
9
c
k
D D
= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.9.1-2)
where
D
c
= Depth of the web in compression in the elastic range determined as
specified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article D6.3.1.
When both edges of the web are in compression, k is taken as 7.2.
The highest Demand over Capacity ratio together with controlling equation is
reported for each section cut.
8 - 26 Web Fatigue Design Request
8.5 Web Fatigue Design Request
Web Fatigue Design Request is used to calculate the Demand over Capacity ra-
tio as defined in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Section 6.10.5.3 Special Fatigue Re-
quirement for Webs. The requirement is applicable to interior panels of webs
with transverse stiffeners. When processing the Design Request from the De-
sign module, the program assumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present
and classifies all web panels as unstiffened. Therefore, when the Design Re-
quest is completed from the Design module, the Design Result Status table
shows the message text No stiffeners defined use optimization form to de-
fine stiffeners.
mize command), the user can specify stiffener locations, and then the program
can recalculate the Web Fatigue Request. In that case the program classifies the
web panels as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria
specified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Section 6.10.9.1. It should be noted that
stiffeners are not modeled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying
stiffeners does not affect the magnitude of the demands.
DoverC
u cr
V V = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.5.3-1)
where
V
u
= Shear in the web at the section under consideration due to demand speci-
fied in the Design Request demand set combos. If the live load distribu-
tion to girders method Use Factor Specified by Design Code is se-
lected in the Design Request, the program adjusts for the multiple pres-
ence factor to account for the fact that fatigue load occupies only one
lane (AASHTO LRFD 2008 section 3.6.1.4.3b) and multiple presence
factors shall not be applied when checking for the fatigue limit state
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 section 3.6.1.1.2).
V
cr
= Shear-buckling resistance determined from AASHTO LRFD 2008 eq.
6.10.9.3.3-1 (see section 8.3.2.3 of this manual)
Constructibility Design Request 8 - 27
8.6 Constructibility Design Request
8.6.1 Staged (Steel-I Comp Construct Stgd)
This request enables the user to verify the superstructure during construction
using a Nonlinear Staged Construction load case. The use of nonlinear staged
analysis allows the user to define multiple snapshots of the structure during
construction where parts of the bridge deck may be at various completion
stages. The user can control which stages the program will include in the calcu-
lations of controlling demand over capacity ratios.
For each section cut specified in the Design Request, the constructibility design
check loops through the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case output steps
that correspond to Output Labels specified in the Demand Set. At each step the
program determines the status of the concrete slab at the girder section cut. The
slab status can be non present, present non-composite, or composite.
The Staged Constructibility Design Check accepts Area Object models. The
Staged Constructibility Design Check cannot be run on Solid or Spine models.
8.6.2 Non-Staged (Steel-I Comp Construct NonStgd)
This request enables the user to verify Demand over Capacity ratios during
construction without the need to define and analyze a Nonlinear Staged Con-
struction load case. For each section cut specified in the Design Request the
Constructibility Design Check loops through all combos specified in the De-
mand Set list. At each combo the program assumes the status of the concrete
slab as specified by the user in the Slab Status column. The slab status can be
non-composite or composite and applies to all the section cuts.
The Non-Staged Constructibility Design Check accepts all Bridge Object
Structural Model Options available in the Update Bridge Structural Model
form (Bridge > Update > Structural Model Options option).
8.6.3 Slab Status vs. Unbraced Length
On the basis of the slab status, the program calculates corresponding positive
flexural capacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. Next the pro-
gram compares the capacities against demands specified in the Demand Set by
8 - 28 Constructibility Design Request
calculating the Demand over Capacity ratio. The controlling Demand Set and
Output Label on a girder basis are reported for every section cut.
When the slab status is composite, the program assumes that the top flange is
continuously braced. When slab status in not present or non-composite, the
program treats both flanges as discretely braced. It should be noted that the
program does not verify the presence of diaphragms at a particular output step.
It assumes that anytime a steel beam is activated at a given section cut that the
unbraced length L
b
for the bottom flange is equal to the distance between the
nearest downstation and the upstation qualifying cross diaphragms or span ends
as defined in the Bridge Object. The program assumes the same L
b
for the top
flange. In other words the unbraced length L
b
is based on the cross diaphragms
that qualify as providing restraint to the bottom flange. Some of the diaphragm
types available in CSiBridge may not necessarily provide restraint to the top
flange. It is the users responsibility to provide top flange temporary bracing at
the diaphragm locations before slabs acting compositely.
8.6.4 Flexure
8.6.4.1 Positive Flexure Non Composite
The Demand over Capacity ratio is evaluated as:
comp top
comp top comp
tens bot
top top top bot
1
3
max , , ,
bu l
bu l bu
bu l
f h yc f nc f crw f h yt
f f
f f f
D f f
C R F F F R F
| |
+
|
+
+
=
|
|
| | | |
\ .

where F
nctop
is the nominal flexural resistance of the discretely braced top flange
determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2 (also see Section
8.3.1.3 of this manual) and F
crwtop
is the nominal bendbuckling resistance for
webs specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without longi-
tudinal stiffeners.
2
0 9
crw
w
. Ek
F
D
t
=
| |
|
\ .
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.9.1-1)
but not to exceed the smaller of R
h
F
yc
and F
yw
/0.7
where

2
9
c
k
D
D
=
| |
|
\ .

When both edges of the web are in compression, k = 7.2.
8.6.4.2 Positive Flexure Composite
The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:
comp comp
tens bot
top top bot
max , ,
bu bu
bu l
f h yc f crw f h yt
f f
f f
D C
R F F R F
| | +
=
|
| | |
\ .

where F
crwtop
is nominal bend-buckling resistance for webs specified in
AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without longitudinal stiffeners
(also see section 8.6.4.1 of this manual).
8.6.4.3 Negative Flexure Non Composite
The Demand over Capacity ratio is evaluated as:
comp bot
comp bot comp tens top
bot bot bot top
1
3
max , , ,
bu l
bu l bu bu l
f h yc f nc f crw f h yt
f f
f f f f f
D C
R F F F R F
| |
+
|
+ +
=
|
|
| | | |
\ .

where F
ncbot
is the nominal flexural resistance of the discretely braced bottom
flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2 (also see
section 8.3.1.3 of this manual) and F
crwbot
is nominal bend-buckling resistance
for webs specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without lon-
gitudinal stiffeners (also see section 8.6.4.1 of this manual).
8.6.4.4 Negative Flexure Composite
The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:
| |
+
|
+
=
|
|
| | | | |
\ .
comp bot
comp bot comp
tens deck
bot bot bot top
1
3
max , , , ,
bu l
bu l bu
bu
f h yc f nc f crw f h yt t r
f f
f f f
f f
D C
R F F F R F f

where F
ncbot
is the nominal flexural resistance of the discretely braced bottom
flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2 (also see
section 8.3.1.3 of this manual), F
crwbot
is the nominal bendbuckling resistance
for webs specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without lon-
gitudinal stiffeners (also see section 8.6.4.1 of this manual), and f
deck
is the de-
mand tensile stress in the deck and f
r
is the modulus of rupture of concrete as
determined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.4.2.6.
8.6.5 Shear
When processing the Design Request from the Design module, the program as-
sumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all web panels
as unstiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classification is
not sufficient to resist the demand specified in the Design Request and the con-
trolling D over C ratio is occurring at a step when the slab status is composite,
the program recommends minimum stiffener spacing to achieve a Demand
over Capacity ratio equal to 1. The recommended stiffener spacing is reported
in the result table under the column heading d0req.
mize command), the user can specify stiffener locations and then the program
can recalculate the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies the web
panels as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria
specified in section 6.10.9.1 of the code. It should be noted that stiffeners are
not modeled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners
does not affect the magnitude of the demands. Adding stiffeners also does not
increase capacity of sections cuts where the concrete slab status is other than
composite.
8.6.5.1 Non Composite Sections

n cr P
V V CV = = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-1)
in which
0.58 .
p yw w
V F Dt = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-2)
The Demand over Capacity ratio is evaluated as
DoverC
u
v n
V
V
=
|

8.6.5.2 Composite Section
8.6.5.2.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs
The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

n p
V CV = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.2-1)
in which
0.58
p yw w
V F Dt = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.2-2)
C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield strength
that is determined as follows:
If 1.12 ,
w yw
D Ek
t F
s then C = 1.0. (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-4)
If 1.12 1.40 ,
yw w yw
Ek D Ek
F t F
< s then
1.12
.
yw
w
Ek
C
D
F
t
=

AASHTO LRFD 2008 (6.10.9.3.2-5)
If 1.40 ,
w yw
D Ek
t F
> then
2
1.57
,
yw
w
Ek
C
F
D
t
| |
=
|
| |
\ .
|
\ .

AASHTO LRFD 2008 (6.10.9.3.2-6)
in which
2
5
5 .
c
k
d
D
= +
| |
|
\ .
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-7)
8.6.5.2.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior Web Panels
The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel, with the section at the
section cut proportioned such that

( )
2
2.5,
w
fc fc ft ft
Dt
b t b t
s
+
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-1)
is taken as

( )
2
0.87 1
1
n p
o
C
V V C
d
D
(
= +
(
( | |
+
|
(
\ .

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-2)
in which 0.58
p yw w
V F Dt = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-3)
where
d
o
= transverse stiffener spacing.
Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

( )
2
0.87 1
1
n p
o o
C
V V C
d d
D D
(
= +
(
| |
(
| |
|
+ +
|
( |
\ .
\ .

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-8)
8.6.5.2.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels

n cr P
V V CV = = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-1)
in which
0.58 .
p yw w
V F Dt = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-2)
DoverC
u
v n
V
V
=
|

Section Optimization 8 - 33
8.7 Section Optimization
After at least one Steel Design Request has been successfully processed, CSi-
Bridge enables the user to open a Steel Section Optimization module. The Op-
timization module allows interactive modification of steel plate sizes and defi-
nition of vertical stiffeners along each girder and span. It recalculates resistance
on the fly based on the modified section without the need to unlock the
model and rerun the analysis. It should be noted that in the optimization proc-
ess the demands are not recalculated and are based on the current CSiBridge
analysis results.
The Optimization form allows simultaneous display of three versions of section
sizes and associated resistance results. The section plate size versions are As
Analyzed, As Designed, and Current. The section plots use distinct colors
for each version black for As Analyzed, blue for As Designed, and red for
Current. When the Optimization form is initially opened, all three versions are
identical and equal to As Analyzed.
Two graphs are available to display various forces, moments, stresses, and ra-
tios for the As Analyzed or As Designed versions. The values plotted can be
controlled by clicking the Select Series to Plot button. The As Analyzed se-
ries are plotted as solid lines and the As Designed series as dashed lines.
To modify steel plate sizes or vertical stiffeners, a new form can be displayed
by clicking on the Modify Section button. After the section modification is
completed, the Current version is shown in red in the elevation and cross sec-
tion views. After the resistance has been recalculated successfully by clicking
the Recalculate Resistance button, the Current version is designated to As De-
signed and displayed in blue.
After the section optimization has been completed, the As Designed plate sizes
and materials can be applied to the analysis bridge object by clicking the OK
button. The button opens a new form that can be used to Unlock the existing
model (in that case all analysis results will be deleted) or save the file under a
new name (New File button). Clicking the Exit button does not apply the new
plate sizes to the bridge object and keeps the model locked. The As Designed
version of the plate sizes will be available the next time the form is opened, and
the Current version is discarded.

Description of Example Model 9 - 1
Chapter 9
Run a Bridge Design Request
This chapter identifies the steps involved in running a Bridge Design Request.
(Chapter 4 explains how to define the Request.) Running the Request applies
the following to the specified Bridge Object:
Program defaults in accordance with the selected codethe Preferences
Type of design to be performedthe check type (Section 4.2.1)
Portion of the bridge to be designedthe station ranges (Section 4.1.3)
Overwrites of the Preferencesthe Design Request parameters (Section
4.1.4)
Load combinationsthe demand sets (Chapter 2)
Live Load Distribution factors, where applicable (Chapter 3)
For this example, the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code is applied to the model of a
concrete box-girder bridge shown in Figure 9-1.
It is assumed that the user is familiar with the steps that are necessary to create
a CSiBridge model of a concrete box girder bridge. If additional assistance is
needed to create the model, a 30-minute Watch and Learn video entitled,
Bridge Bridge Information Modeler is available at the CSI website
9 - 2 Description of Example Model
www.csiberkeley.com. The tutorial video guides the user through the creation
of the bridge model referenced in this chapter.

Figure 9-1 3D view of example concrete box girder bridge model
9.1 Description of Example Model
The example bridge is a two-span prestressed concrete box girder bridge with
the following features:
Abutments: The abutments are skewed by 15 degrees and connected to the
bottom of the box girder only.
Prestress: The concrete box girder bridge is prestressed with four 10-in
2

tendons (one in each girder) and a jacking force of 2160 kips per tendon.
Bents: The one interior bent has three 5-foot-square columns.
Deck: The concrete box girder has a nominal depth of 5 feet. The deck has
a parabolic variation in depth from 5 feet at the abutments to a maximum
of 10 feet at the interior bent support.
Spans: The two spans are each approximately 100 feet long.

Figure 9-2 Elevation view of example bridge
Chapter 9 - Run a Bridge Design Request
Design Preferences 9 - 3

Figure 9-3 Plan view of the example bridge
9.2 Design Preferences
Use the Design/Rating > Super str uctur e Design > Pr efer ences command to
select the AASHTO LRFD 2007 design code. The Bridge Design Preferences
form shown in Figure 9-4 displays.

Figure 9-4 Bridge Design Preferences form
9.3 Load Combinations
For this example, the default design load combinations were activated using the
Design/Rating > Load Combinations > Add Defaults command. After the
Bridge Design option has been selected, the Code-Generated Load Combina-
tions for Bridge Design form shown in Figure 9-5 displays. The form is used to
9 - 4 Load Combinations
specify the desired limit states. Only the Strength II limit state was selected for
this example. Normally, several limit states would be selected.

Figure 9-5 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design form
The defined load combinations for this example are shown in Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6 Define Load Combinations form
Chapter 9 - Run a Bridge Design Request
Bridge Design Request 9 - 5
The Str-II1, Str-II2 and StrIIGroup1 designations for the load combinations are
specified by the program and indicate that the limit state for the combinations
is Strength Level II.
9.4 Bridge Design Request
After the Design/Rating > Super str uctur e Design > Design Request com-
mand has been used, the Bridge Design Request form shown in Figure 9-7 dis-
plays.

Figure 9- 7 Define Load Combinations form
The name given to this example Design Request is FLEX_1, the Check Type
is for Concr ete Box Flexur e and the Demand Set, DSet1, specifies the combi-
nation as Str II (Strength Level II).
9 - 6 Start Design/Check of the Bridge
The only Design Request Parameter option for a Concrete Box Flexural check
type is for PhiC. A value of 0.9 for PhiC is used.
9.5 Start Design/Check of the Bridge
After an analysis has been run, the bridge model is ready for a design/check.
Use the Design/Rating > Super str uctur e Design > Run Super command to
start the design process. Select the design to be run using the Perform Bridge
Design form shown in Figure 9-8:

Figure 9-8 Perform Bridge Design - Superstructure
The user may select the desired Design Request(s) and click on the Design
Now button. A plot of the bridge model, similar to that shown in Figure 9-9,
will display.
If several Design Requests
have been run, the individ-
ual Design Requests can be
selected from the Design
Check options drop-down
list. This plot is described
further in Chapter 10.

Figure 9-9 Plot of flexure
check results

Display Results as a Plot 10 - 1
Chapter 10
Display Bridge Design Results
Bridge design results can be displayed on screen and as printed output. The
on-screen display can depict the bridge response graphically as a plot or in data
tables. The Advanced Report Writer can be used to create the printed output,
which can include the graphical display as well as the database tables.
This chapter displays the results for the example used in Chapter 9. The model
is a concrete box girder bridge and the code applied is AASHTO LRFD 2007.
Creation of the model is shown in a 30-minute Watch and Learn video on the
CSI website, www.csiberkeley.com.
10.1 Display Results as a Plot
To view the forces, stresses, and design results graphically, click the Home >
Display > Show Br idge Super str uctur e Design Results command, which
will display the Bridge Object Response Display form shown in Figure 10-1.
The plot shows the design results for the FLEX_1 Design Request created us-
ing the process described in the preceding chapters. The demand moments are
enveloped and shown in the blue region, and the negative capacity moments
are shown with a brown line. If the demand moments do not exceed the capaci-
ty moments, the superstructure may be deemed adequate in response to the
flexure Design Request. Move the mouse pointer onto the demand or capacity
plot to view the values for each nodal point. Move the pointer to the capacity
10 - 2 Display Results as a Plot
moment at station 1200 and 536981.722 kip-in is shown. A verification calcu-
lation that shows agreement with this CSiBridge result is provided in Section
10.4.

Figure 10-1 Plot of flexure check results for the example bridge design model
10.1.1 Additional Display Examples
Use the Home > Display > Show Br idge For ces/Str esses command to select,
on the example form shown in Figure 10-2, the location along the top or bot-
tom portions of a beam or slab for which stresses are to be displayed. Figures
10-3 through 10-9 illustrate the left, middle, and right portions as they apply to
Mul t i cel l Concrete Box Sections. Location 1, as an example, refers to the
top left selection option while location 5 would refer to the bottom center se-
lection option. Locations 1, 2, and 3 refer to the top left, top center, and top
right selection option while locations 4, 5, and 6 refer to the bottom left, bot-
tom center, and bottom right selection options.

Chapter 10 - Display Bridge Design Results
Display Results as a Plot 10- 3

Figure 10-2 Select the location on the beam or slab for which results are to be displayed

Figure 10-3 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Vertical
Top slab cut line
Bottomslab cut line
Centerline of the web Centerline of the web
1 2 3
4
5
6
4
5
6
1 2 3

Figure 10-4 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Sloped

Figure 10-5 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Clipped
Top slab cut

Bottomslab cut line
Centerline of the web
4
5
6
1 2 3
1 2 3
4
5
6
Top slab cut

Bottomslab cut line
1 2 3
4
5 6
4
5
6
1 2
3
Display Results as a Plot 10- 5

Figure 10-6 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders and Radius

Figure 10-7 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Sloped Max
4 5 6
1 2 1 2
6
3
5
4
1 2 3
4, 5
6
Top slab cut

Bottomslab cut line
Centerline of the web Centerline of the web
1 2 3
1 2
3
4
5
6
4
5 6
Top slab cut line
Bottomslab cut line
3

Figure 10-8 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - Advanced

Figure 10-9 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - AASHTO - PCI - ASBI Standard
Bottomslab cut line
Top slab cut line
Top slab cut line
Bottomslab cut line
1 2 3
1 2 3
4
5 6
1
2 3
4
5 6
4
5
6
Display Data Tables 10- 7
10.2 Display Data Tables
To view design results on screen in tables, click the Home > Display > Show
Tables command, which will display the Choose Tables for Display form
shown in Figure 10-10. Use the options on that form to select which data re-
sults are to be viewed. Multiple selection may be made.

Figure 10-10 Choose Tables for Display form
When all selections have been made, click the OK button and a database table
similar to that shown in Figure 10-11 will display. Note the drop-down list in
the upper right-hand corner of the table. That drop-down list will include the
various data tables that match the selections made on the Choose Tables for
Display form. Select from that list to change to a different database table.
10 - 8 Advanced Report Writer

Figure 10-11 Design database table for AASHTO LRFD 2007 flexure check
The scroll bar along the bottom of the form can be used to scroll to the right to
view additional data columns.
10.3 Advanced Report Writer
The Or b > Repor t > Cr eate Repor t command is a single button click output
option but it may not be suitable for bridge structures because of the size of the
document that is generated. Instead, the Advanced Report Writer feature within
CSiBridge is a simple and easy way to produce a custom output report.
To create a custom report that includes input and output, first export the files
using one of the Or b > Expor t commands: Access; Excel; or Text. When this
command is executed, a form similar to that shown in Figure 10-12 displays.
Advanced Report Writer 10- 9

Figure 10-12 Choose Tables for Export to Access form
This important step allows control over the size of the report to be generated.
Export only those tables to be included in the final report. However, it is possi-
ble to export larger quantities of data and then use the Advanced Report Writer
to select only specific data sets for individual reports, thus creating multiple
smaller reports. For this example, only the Bridge Data (input) and Concrete
Box Flexure design (output) are exported.
After the data tables have been exported and saved to an appropriate location,
click the Or b > Repor t > Advanced Repor t Wr iter command to display a
form similar to that show in Figure 10-13. Click the appropriate button (e.g.,
Find existing DB File, Convert Excel File, Convert Text File) and locate the
exported data tables. The tables within that Database, Excel, or Text file will be
listed in the List of Tables in Current Database File display box.
10 - 10 Advanced Report Writer

Figure 10-13 Create Custom Report form
Select the tables to be included in the report from that display box. The se-
lected items will then display in the Items Included in Report display box. Use
the various options on the form to control the order in which the selected tables
appear in the report as well as the headers (i.e., Section names), page breaks,
pictures, and blanks required for final output in .rft, .txt, or .html format.
After the tables have been selected and the headers, pictures, and other format-
ting items have been addressed, click the Cr eate Repor t button to generate the
report. The program will request a filename and the path to be used to store the
report. Figure 10-14 shows an example of the printed output generated by the
Report Writer.
Verification 10- 11

Figure 10-14 An example of the printed output
10.4 Verification
As a verification check of the design results, the output at station 1200 is ex-
amined. The following output for negative bending has been pulled from the
ConBoxFlexure data table, a portion of which is shown in Figure 10-10:
Demand moment, DemandMax (kip-in) = 245973.481
Resisting moment, ResistingNeg (kip-in) = 536981.722
Total area of prestressing steel, AreaPTTop (in
2
) = 20.0
Top k factor, kFactorTop = 0.2644444
Neutral axis depth, c, CDistForNeg (in) = 5.1286
Effective stress in prestressing, f
ps
, EqFpsForNeg (kip/in
2
) = 266.7879
A hand calculation that verifies the results follows:
For top k factor, from (eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2),
2451
2 104 2 104 026444
270
PY
PU
f .
k . . .
f

= = =

(Results match)
10 - 12 Verification
For neutral axis depth, from (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4),
( )
slab webeq slabeq
1 webeq
0.85
,
0.85
PT PU c
PU
c PT
PT
A f f b b t
c
f
f b kA
Y

=
+
for a T-section
1 webeq
,
0.85
PT PU
PU
c PT
PT
A f
c
f
f b kA
Y
=
+
when not a T-section
20.0(270)
5.1286
270
0.85(4)(0.85)(360) 0.26444(20)
114
c = =

+

(Results match)
For effective stress in prestressing, from (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1),
51286
1 270 1 026444 266788
144
PS PU
PT
c .
f f k . .
Y

= = =

(Results match)
For resisting moment, from (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.2.2-1),
( )
slabeq
1 1
SLAB webeq slabeq
0.85
2 2 2

= +

N PT PS PT c
t
c c
M A f Y f b b t
1
2

=

N PT PS PT
c
M A f Y , when the box section is not a T-section
N
M

= =

5.1286(0.85)
20.0(266.788) 144 596646.5
2
kip-in
R N
M M = = = 0.85(596646.5) 536981.8 kip-in (Results match)
The preceding calculations are a check of the flexure design output. Other de-
sign results for concrete box stress, concrete box shear, and concrete box prin-
cipal have not been included. The user is encouraged to perform a similar
check of these designs and to review Chapters 5, 6, and 7 for a detailed descrip-
tions of the design algorithms.

Bibliography - 1
Bibliography
ACI, 2007. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-08)
and Commentary (ACI 318R-08), American Concrete Institute, P.O.
Box 9094, Farmington Hills, Michigan.
AASHTO, 2009. AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge
Design. American Association of Highway and Transportation Offi-
cials, 444 North Capital Street, NW Suite 249, Washington, DC 2001
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), 2006. Canadian Highway Bridge De-
sign Code. Canadian Standards Association, 5060 Spectrum Way,
Suite 100, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada, L4W 5N6. November.

Bridge Superstructure Design

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Bridge Superstructure Design

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Bridge Superstructure Design

ISO BRG083110M3 Rev. 3

This is equivalent to:

(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4)

Você também pode gostar